Home

Channel Isolated Analog-Digital Converter

1. Maximum value minimum value information Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 z Module model name Q68AD G ne Setting item Curent value Setting value W CH4 Marimum value gt CH4 Minimum value e CHS Marimum value CH5 Minimum value CHE Maximum value CHE Minimum value CH7 Maximum value CH7 Minimum value CH8 Maximum value z CHE Minimum value ie Maximum value minimum value reset request Release E Flash ROM setting Details E Current value Monitoring display gt Cannot execute test W i Make text file 5 Z gt O nO Stop monitor on Pass data Zz O 1 lt o 4 Offset gain setting T cCHOOperating condition setting o on CH1 Operating condition settini p 2 d Offset Gain setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Offset gain settings is performed 5 Module model name Q68A4D G E Current module Q68AD G 0000H Error code T n Setting item Current value Setting valve W Ww CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable Disable ara CH1 Averaging process specification Samping Sampling ZDO CHT Average time Average number of times Channel Senses Offset setting tow Moving average Time constant settings Channel No 7 Sr a Wg Sampling 0 Time averaging 40 to 5000ms selection Offset setting Gain setti
2. 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 1 Offset gain setting procedure i gt C Start 2 t Switch to the offset gain setting Verify that the channel change 6 mode 1 completed flag XB is ON l Verify that the mode is set to Set the channel change request A 9 offset gain setting and the RUN YB to OFF Pz LED is flashing T aS 1 _____ _ gt Add the current that will be the gain ss Set the offset setting channel in value buffer memory address 22 Un G22 Set buffer memory address 23 Turn ON the offset gain change o Un G23 to 0 request YC Turn the channel change request Make sure that the offset gain ra YB to ON 2 change completed flag XC is ON D D k d Verify that the channel change TSC a change completed flag XB is ON i y z Set the channel change request Adjust other 1 o YB to OFF channels w a Zu i ee oS Add the current that will be the Tai tw OL offset value Turn ON the user range writing 3 an 5 request YA and set the offset and i gain i Turn ON the offset gain change Register the setting to the Q66AD DG 2 request YC i Me i After verifying that the offset gain oO lt y setting mode status flag XA is 5 Make sure that the offset gain OFF tur
3. 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 5 2 Programming example without using the utility package M102 mov H38 D1000 mov K50 D1002 mov K100 D1003 mov H420 D1024 mov H3E D1047 mov H3B3D D1048 mov K1000 D1090 mov K1500 D1091 mov K6000 D1092 mov K7000 D1093 mov K50 D1120 mov K3 D1130 mov KL D1131 mov K100 D1142 M102 x129 Y129 J H ko KO 7r REMTO yu K1 KL H2 KO D1000 K4 M200 M200 M201 t ZP REMTO gL K1 K1 H2 K24 D1024 K1 M210 M210 M211 _ ze REMTO gu K1 K1 H2 K47 D1047 K2 M220 M220 M221 4 2P REMTO yi Kl K1 H2 K90 D1090 K4 M230 M230 M231 4 ZP REMTO JIS Kl K1 H2 K120 D1120 K1 M240 M240 M241 4 ZP REMTO yu K1 K1 H2 K130 D1130 K2 M250 M250 M251 Jz REMTO gin K1 K1 H2 K142 D1142 K1 M260 x129 Y129 M260 M261 ms J SET 2 e 1f r n SET 4128 Y129 x129 4 RST Y129 MELSEC TE eries A D conversion enable disable setting CH2 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings CH3 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Averaging process specification Input signal error detection settings Warning output settings CH2 process alarm lower lower limit value CH2 process alarm lower upper limit value CH2 process alarm upper lower limit value CH2 process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 rate alarm warning d
4. 5 6 5 Pass data Q66AD DG Perform operation in the following sequence to save restore the user range ag W 1 Switch to the Pass data screen Perform the operation in Section 5 6 1 to display the pass data screen Zz p di e ass data H Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 gt 3 Module model name Q66AD DG E L poate Setting tem Setting value nO CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0000 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0000 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0000 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0000 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value ooo CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0000 N CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0000 Zz CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0000 O CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 00001 E CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 0000 q CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 0000 2 Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring i ae Hexadecimal input es Make text file Setting range 0000 FFFF Zz O Stop monitor Execute test gt ara 2509 tow 2 U i a Wg 2 User range saving Sale FOL wow nom a Change the Setting value field of pass data read request to Request and click the Execute test button When read is completed the values are displayed in the Current value fields
5. b When switching the mode using the setting of the mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and operation condition setting request Y9 z W E E ba tid eens ta ons 2 1 Normal mode initial setting i m i i Fser moo q Turns ON Module ready check flag E 2 Ve w i move a3c i al enable disable i TO Zz N 2 Adding initial setting items H i O i E rena 05 q Turns ON operation condition E setting request Y9 o asr wog q Turns OFF Module ready fe fe 4 check flag 26 i M50 M51 Y9 x9 Turns OFF operation condition nO PRE oe Cg nas 4 mere eee E i ga I i TTY fet ___ 2 ___ A setting request Y9 Switches to offset gain setting mode MS xe ue m AR Sets 4144n to buffer memory M l F poy Bai S38 J address 158 Fov nga isg J Sets 964H to buffer memory 2 address 159 2 rae 7 Turns ON operation condition 3 setting request Y9 iL se M50 1 n rae Ff a Eas Turns OFF operation condition VI VI VI ae Ls i 4 setting request Y9 z O z Common program PE W 5o Switches to norinal mode z5 ToN Q y it EEE oon am rov aaa ane J Sets 4144H to buffer memory address 159 ser Y9 Y Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 uw ser M51 7 S g exe ne st M50 Z MS M51 Y9 xo aa 5 8 t k ast v9 Turns OFF operation condition Ee setting request Y9 oLe M51 K10 Qo J 1 second
6. Start tec ee eee scene a as x5 A D conversion enable A disable setting Do you perform input signal error detection and Do you perform NO warning output process averaging processing alarm rate alarm YES Set the average count Input signal error Set the average time detection warning output settings Set the move average count Set the time constant 5 Set the process alarm upper lower limit values J T Set the rate alarm warning detection period S Averaging process n Set the rate alarm upper lower limit values n sp cification 2 Set the input signal error detection setting values 2 a amp NO Do you perform scaling function i Do you set the A D NO conversion starting time YES Q66AD DG only Set the scaling enable disable setting 4 E x y A D conversion starting time setting Turn ON the operating condition setting request Y9 4 r Read the digital output values y End 6 1 6 1 Programming Procedure 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 1 System configuration S D QCPU Q68AD G X Y0 to X YF CH1 external device CH2 external device 3 W OF CH3 external device Al QY10 Y20 to Y2F che QX10 X10 to X1F n 2 Conditions for the intelligent function module switch setting 5 5 CH1 5 CH2 4 t
7. 6 2 3 Programming example without using the utility package 1 List of devices z D1 CH1 Digital output value D2 CH2 Digital output value D3 CH3 Digital output value z MO to M2 A D conversion completed flag 2 M100 Module ready check flag M12 M13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm a 2 M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm 2 6 M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag ua XO Module ready x9 Operating condition setting completed flag 7 XC Input signal error detection signal XE A D conversion completed flag Q68AD G X Y0 to X YF z XF Error flag i Y9 Operating condition setting request a YF Error clear request se Digital output value read command input X10 anal 2ds QX10 X10 to X1F E X11 Input signal error detection reset signal 2 g X12 Error reset signal eris Y20 to Y2B Error code display BCD 3 digits QY10 Y20 to Y2F a aie mAn oom Be g5 exe ae Zo s EG 2O e z fo fe a a z gt a S ag zapa OO Z a N a ra 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 8 6 2 3 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 2 Programming example Initial settings x0 tt set M100 M100 x9 Y9 UO ig J f 0 4 if if E Mov HOF8 G0 E u0 MOV K50 G
8. Example 1 Digital output value when the analog input value varied from 0 to 1V When the high resolution mode and the input range of O to 10V is a specified for the Q68AD G i The variation of the digital output value at the time constant setting of O 1000ms 1s is as shown below 1000ms 1s after the analog input value has reached 1V the digital E Z output value reaches 63 2 of the value attained when the sampling E processing is selected no Analog input value Digital output value E 2 1 2 12000 Z9 S 1 10000 D 3 3 08 8000 amp P 5 5 z 5 0 6 6000 E 2 S 2 0 4 4000 rs 3 2 E lt 02 2000 5 0 0 g 1900 Elapsed time ms 6 ow awa Example 2 Digital output value when the variation of the analog input value has a An a Woe ringing waveform S9 wo W When the high resolution mode and the input range of O to 10V is Vam specified for the Q68AD G The variations of the digital output values at the time constant setting W of 2000ms 2s at the time constant setting of 1000ms 1s and at os the moving average processing of 16 times are as shown below ze Zz Zo Analog input value Digital output value E i time constant setting 1000ms 5 oQ Digital output value Digital output value moving average processing 16 times time constant setting 2000ms 12000 10000 Z o S 3 gooo S 2 S 5 5 g S 2 6000 2 9 F 3 x 3 4000 2 2000 2 0 a i Q Elaps
9. Refresh parameters Link side PLC side Dev name Points Start Dev name Paints 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 5 2 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Programming example a Remote I O station operating status checking Z spa7 ito 3 Master station baton pass status S x checking e E Ai gt Master station data link status i checking ee rioz A 5 Remote I O station baton pass status checking 5 ae ios D Remote O station data link status E checking SW78 0 H K3 OEI l L r104 gt Remote I O parameter communication O status checking pe L ann RST M103 7 2 Q J Oo T100 T10 m no T102 Zz O z 103 O L T104 oO Ww a N SB20 T100 T101 T102 T103 T104 2 4 i f t 4 uc No M100 J Master module status checking M103 sar M101 7 5 E NO M100 N tes rs lu W Initial setting oe ton k l 9 a a H PLS M102 tow M10 5 o amp fast M101 7 FOL Wo Wi nom ser M103 1 5 w og 5 exe He oz Zo Eo EXa 2O e oO z lt a 0 e a a Ww E a S WO zZ oz CS a OO 0 Z O O E N w a O ra 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 36 6 5 2 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 37
10. b Click the Execution button to enable a module change z Online module change Operation Target module oe gt Module change execution 1 0 address OOH O 7 ee Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed 6 Status Guidance E 20 Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the eS E intelligent function module 2 5 nO ie Zz O 3 If the following error screen appears the user range cannot be saved i Click the OK button dismount the module as is and perform the operation in a Section 2 c and later Zz MELSOFT series GX Developer 2 The target module didn t respond n The task is advanced to the installation confirmation a A Hl 250 lt a a QA BOR wow nam ane fid c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the we 0 connector and dismount the module S OD lt i z6 H Point a Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the mod as ule being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit f0 z Oo a a Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 22 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG el series 3 Mount
11. b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Un G20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Un G21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 For Q66AD DG information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 Setting ranges of Q68AD G Input range Setting value 4 to 20 mA OH 0 to 20 mA 1H 1to5V 2H Oto5V 3H 10 to 10V 4H 0 to 10 V 5H 4 to 20 mA Extended mode AH 1 to 5 V Extended mode BH User range setting FH Setting ranges of Q66AD DG Input range Setting value 4 to 20 mA OH For 2 wire transmitter input 4 to 20 mA For current input 6H 0 to 20 mA For current input 7H 4 to 20 mA Expanded mode Ai For 2 wire transmitter input 4 to 20 mA Expanded mode cu For current input User range setting Ey For current input User range setting FH For 2 wire transmitter input Point The input range setting cannot be changed in this area Change the input range setting in the intelligent function module switch setting Refer to Section 4 5 3 58 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Write data error code Un G19 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 8 Offset gain setting mode offset gain specification Un G22 Un G23 a 1 Specify the channel to be adjusted for the offset gain settings gt 2 Specify the channel to be adjusted with an offset value in Un G22 and the channel to be adjusted with a gain value in Un G23
12. ceee 3 60 Averaging processing eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 13 B Buffer Memory 0 ccccccceceeeeseeeeeeseneeeaeeees 3 42 3 49 C Channel change completed flag eeee 3 37 Channel change request ccccceeeeeeetteeeeeeenaes 3 40 Check terminals cccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 3 Close parameters cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 5 12 Common mode characteristic cccceeeeeeees 3 1 Confirmation of Conversion Characteristic 5 23 Count averaging eeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetteeeteeetteeeeeeeaaas 3 13 Current input characteristic ccseeeeeeeeees 3 8 D Dedicated instruction list c cceeeeeeeeeeees App 1 Delete parameters cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeees 5 12 Dielectric withstand voltage 00cee 3 2 3 3 Digital OUtDUL cccecceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeteneeeaeees 3 1 3 3 Digital output value 0 eee eee eeeteeeeeeetteeeeeeeenaees 3 57 E ERR LED coreane RR 4 5 Error clear request ceceeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeees 3 40 Error code Listerine oo 8 1 Error flag ooien ei tee 3 39 External dimensions ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 15 External supply DOWED 2 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 3 External wiring ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceneeaeees 4 8 4 9 F FB COnVerSiOn ceccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeeee
13. O I H W a fe v4 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 35 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device No X9 3 36 Signal Name Operating condition setting completed flag MELSEC TE eries Description 1 This signal is used as an interlock condition to turn ON OFF the Operating condition setting request Y9 when any of the following settings has been changed A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO CHD Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Averaging process specification Un G24 Un G25 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting Un G47 Warning output settings Un G48 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 CHO scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G77 CHO conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 1 Un G78 to Un G83 CHO process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 CHO rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 CHO rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 CHO input signal error detection setting value CHL input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 CHO input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 2 When the operating condition setting completed flag X9 is OFF A D conversion processing is not performed Under t
14. Time averaging 40 to 5000 ms A Count averaging 4 to 500 times Moving average 2 to 60 times e Primary delay filter 10 to 5000 ms 2 G a 2 Point 1 For the time averaging marked set a value equal to or greater than 4 times x 10ms x number of channels used If any insufficient value is set an error o occurs and 0 is stored as a digital output value 256 W 2 For the primary delay filter marked 2 set a value equal to or greater than 395 10ms x number of channels used If any insufficient value is set an error oo m occurs and 0 is stored as a digital output value 3 Writing a value outside the range to a channel will cause an error storing an A error code in Error code Un G19 and turning ON the Error flag XF If this b3 occurs A D conversion is performed based on the setting before the error o3 detection z 4 Since the default setting is 0 change it for the selected processing method ESS 5 If a value is set to a sampling processing channel the value is ignored oO Zz lt L ug 0 O a oa W 5 a S LW z9 2 OO 0 Z E O O E i 2 O E 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 55 3 4 3 CH average time average number of times moving average time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 4 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 1 When A D conversion of a conversion enabled channel is complete the A D conversion completed flag is set to 1
15. eee ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeteaees 8 5 8 2 2 When the ERR LED is on or flashing cee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeseenaeeeeseenaaes 8 5 8 2 3 When the ALM LED is on or flashing ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeesneeaees 8 5 8 2 4 When the digital output values Cannot be read 00 eee ceeteeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaaes 8 6 8 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn ON during use in normal mode 8 7 8 2 6 Checking the A D converter module status using GX Developer system monitor 8 7 APPENDIX App 1 to App 15 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available DeviCes 2 c eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenceceeeeeeeeeneess App 1 Appendix 1 1G P OFF GAN ihe e topes Desde p dd volgende dite becca decane sed eaa araa i aa a eti App 2 Appendix 1 2G P O GEOAD eea saves aan aaa aeaaaee n sends nada agusedaadadechanas e aaee eindanna aare aaan daa iat daikh ea App 4 Appendix 1 3G P iOGS TOR a a nes a e a aaa aa Eae aaa ea SAAE heed Aa aa aa Era a aaa App 8 Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeees App 13 Appendix 3 External Dimensi ns e e a a aa ra ee iar raeed aaa eE Aee e taa aisat aaeeea App 15 INDEX Index 1 Index 2 A 10 MANUALS The manuals related to this product are listed below Please place an or
16. 1 Offset gain setting procedure C Start D 2 Switch to the offset gain setting Turn the channel change request Z mode 1 YB to ON E 5 y Verify that the mode is set to Se offset gain setting and the RUN LED Verify that the channel change ii is flashing completed flag XB is ON g a 1 no y Add the voltage or current that will Set the channel change request YB be the offset value to OFF 2 Set the offset setting channel in Ee buffer memory address 22 Un G22 Adjust other channels YES 1 2 Set buffer memory address 23 O Un G23 to 0 a Turn ON the user range writing 2 Turn the channel change request request YA and set the offsetand 5 l Register the setting to the Q68AD G 2 ti i i a Verify that the channel change za it completed flag XB is ON After verifying that the offset gain DOs setting mode status flag XA is OFF on turn YA OFF an Set the channel change request YB en ay to OFF Y l Set the user range writing request i amp YA to OFF 3 lt Add the voltage or current that will be S 5 the gain value Y g 2 Verify that the offset gain setting mode 5 status flag XA is ON 5 om Set the gain setting channel in buffer BOE memory address 23 Un G23 Set buffer memory address 22 Un G22 ERR LED lit YES 2 to 0 Switch to the normal setting mode z S C End 1 The mode switching normal mode to offset gain setting
17. MELSEC TE eries 1 Q68AD G 2 Q66AD DG Terminal Terminal g Terminal A Terminal y Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name number number number number A1 CH1 V B1 CH1 V I A1 CH1 P B1 CH1 I CHK A2 CH1 1 B2 A2 B2 CH1 I CHK A3 B3 CH2 V A3 B3 S oo a A4 CH2 V l B4 CH2 1 A4 CH2 P B4 CH2 CHK 6 ocal BS A5 z B5 A5 B5 CH21 CHK fe oo a AG CH3 V B6 CH3 V 1 A6 B6 e eae A7 CH3 1 B7 A7 CH3 P B7 CH31 CHK A oo aa A8 B8 CH4 V A8 B8 CH3 I CHK fa eed ice A9 CH4 V l B9 CH4 1 A9 z B9 3 p oo a A10 B10 A10 CH4 P B10 CH4 1 CHK nde anal Cee A11 CH5 V B11 CH5 V 1 A11 B11 CH4 I CHK A oo be A12 CH5 1 B12 A12 B12 3 ela El Bis A13 B13 CH6 V A13 CH5 P B13 CH5 CHK a to ate A14 CH6 V I B14 CH6 1 A14 B14 CH5 I CHK ae la alaia A15 3 B15 A15 B15 a oo a A16 CH7 V B16 CH7 V I A16 CH6 P B16 CH6 CHK Gi A17 CH7 I B17 A17 z B17 CH61 CHK Seen from the front A18 B18 CH8 V A18 B18 of the module A19 CH8V I B19 CH8 A19 24VDC B19 24VDC A20 B20 A20 24GDC B20 24GDC P Power supply for 2 wire transmitter I CHK 2 wire transmitter current input Current input check terminal l CHK Current input check terminal 3 Connector for external wiring The connectors for use with the A D conve
18. 3 Program example The following program is designed to switch the A D converter module mounted in the position of I O number X Y0 to X YF to the offset gain setting mode when M10 is turned ON and to return it to the normal mode when M10 is turned OFF Switches to offset gain setting mode M10 Stores setting of dedicated e Ki 0i instruction G OFFGAN into D1 G CFFGAN ud D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN XOA Performs processing for offset gain setting Switches to normal mode M10 WOP KO D1 Stores setting of dedicated un instruction G OFFGAN into D1 G CFFGAN uo D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN XOA Performs processing for normal mode App 3 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices Appendix 1 1 G P OFFGAN APPENDIX MELSEC Led series Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD Reads the offset gain values of the user range setting of the A D converter module to the CPU Usable devices eal device Link direct device Intelligent eal stem user JOO function constant u Set data bi File Index reg register S module ieee Word device Ister EEI UO GO D O Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G OGLOAD G OGLOAD Un S D Command SSS GP OGLOAD GP OGLOAD Un S D Set data Set data Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of the module 0 to
19. 4 to 20mA Extended mode For current input The input ranges supported by the analog input range extended mode cannot be used for products of incom patible version BG Q series Applicable version First 5 digits of product number 10102 or later GX Configurator AD 2 09K or later Reference section Section3 1 1 Section4 5 Input signal error detec tion extended setting When the warning of input signal error detection is enabled the input signal error detection can be per formed by setting the same value of upper and lower limit or different value of upper and lower limit The input signal error detection cannot be performed by setting the different value of upper and lower limit but can be performed by setting the same value of upper and lower limit Set the buffer memories as follows e Un G47 b15 to b6 Fixed at 0 e Un G150 to Un G155 Reserved system area 10102 or later 2 09K or later Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade Section3 2 3 Section3 4 11 Section3 4 22 App 14 APPENDIX INDEX APPENDIX MELSEC Eseries Appendix 3 External Dimensions 1 Q68AD G Ff 102 4 02 o L 90 3 54 23 0 91 137 5 39 27 4 s 1 08 Unit mm inch 2 Q66AD DG T SSS
20. 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 2 Function List Table 3 3 lists the functions of the A D converter modules OVERVIEW Table3 3 Function list Item Function Reference section A 1 Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel A D conversion enable 2 Since the conversion time is 10ms per channel disabling A D conversion of Section 3 4 2 disable setting unused channels can reduce the entire conversion time 1 Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 Averaging processing a Time averaging A D conversion is averaged in terms of time on a channel basis and a digital average value is output A D conversion method b Count averaging Section 3 2 1 A D conversion is averaged in terms of count on a channel basis and a digital average value is output 2 z E lt Q L O wW a N c Move averaging The specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time are averaged 3 Primary delay filter A digital output value is smoothed according to the preset time constant Maximum and minimum 1 The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the values hold function module Section 3 2 2 BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES 1 A voltage or curre
21. Do not change the data read with the G P OGLOAD instruction If it is changed normal operation cannot be guaranteed Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 8 Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR x a z m a a lt INDEX APPENDIX MELSEC TA eries Control data of Q68AD G Device Item Set data Setting range Set by S System area Stores the status when the instruction is S 1 Completion status iia Normal completin System Other than 0 Abnormal completion The value set to Pass data classification setting S 2 using the G OGLOAD instruc tion is stored S 2 Pass data classification setting jasna are 0000H to OOFFH System b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 0 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 S 3 System area S 4 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 5 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 6 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 7 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 8 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 9 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 10 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 11 CH4 Indu
22. OVERVIEW This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules z e lt 5 o uw z fe 8 SYSTEM a When mounted with a CPU module The table below shows the CPU modules and base units applicable to the A D converter module and quantities for each CPU model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 1 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG FY aries power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Table2 1 Applicable modules number of mountable modules and applicable base units Applicable CPU module Base unit 2 No of modules g p Extension base CPU type CPU model Main base unit nit uni QOO0JCPU Basic model QCPU QOOCPU Up to 24 o O Q01CPU QO02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Up to 64 O oO Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Process CPU COOPHERU Up to 64 O O Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU ae Up to 53 x O Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU Up to 16 QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Programmable QO2UCPU Up to 36 controller CPU QO3UDCPU QO04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU oO oO QO3UD
23. PLC oto intel Q664AD DG ooooj 0000 _oFoo ea eee 7 6 23 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 4 1 Before creating a program 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 6 4 2 Programming example using the utility package 1 List of devices S aA D1 D11 CH1 Digital output value 2 D2 D12 CH2 Digital output value D3 D13 CH3 Digital output value z D6 D7 Warning output flag De Input signal error detection flag pg Error code o MO to M2 A D conversion completed flag 6 M12 M13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm 2 M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag X0 Module ready n XC Input signal error detection signal 2 XE A D conversion completed flag 5 Q66AD DG X Y0 to X YF iL XF Error flag O W Y9 Operating condition setting request F YF Error clear request X10 Digital output value read command input signal a X11 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X10 to X1F 2 X12 Error reset signal or Y20 to Y2B Error code display BCD 3 digits QY10 Y20 to Y2F la m tow 1 Devices used for the auto refresh function of GX Configurator AD 6 x mAn nom 2 Operating the utility package a Initial setting Refer to Section 5 4 Me Set the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 SE Refer to Section 6 4 for the settings lt 2 z
24. oO zZ o O a a w 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 6 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 3 Mounting of new module a Mount a new module to the same slot and install the connector b After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H o a e Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart N Changing module r Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel 4 Operation check a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control resumption Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H A A Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute b Click the OK button to leave the Onl
25. x Point 4 These signals cannot be used by the user since they are for system use only If these are turned ON OFF by the sequence program the performance of the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed 3 34 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 3 2 Details of I O signals I O signals for the A D converter modules are explained in detail below i G 1 Input signals Device No Signal Name Description 1 When the programmable controller CPU is powered on or reset this signal turns on once the preparation for A D conversion has been completed and A D conversion processing is then per lt formed 3 xo Module ready 2 In either of the following states the Module ready XO turns OFF FR During offset gain setting mode A D conversion processing is performed a S When the A D converter module has a watchdog timer error A D conversion processing is not performed High resolution ae gt X7 1 This turns ON when in high resolution mode mode status flag 1 The Warning output signal X8 turns ON at detection of a process alarm or rate alarm a Process alarm 1 This signal turns ON when the digital output value falls outside the setting range set to the process alarm upper lower limit values Un G86 to Un G117 on any of the channels enabled for A D conversion after the
26. 1 4 to 20mA Practical analog input range p T 1 High resolution 1 mode 1228k cs Se ee ee a a aena a ee ee 12000 SSF SSS SE SS SS ey l Normal resolution 1 04 20 Analog input current mA 3 4 to 20mA Expanded mode Analog input practical range High resolution mode l 1 l 1 1 l l l 1 f L 04 20 22 Analog input current mA Digital output value 2 0 to 20mA Analog input practical range 12287 12000 4095 4000 96 288 p High resolution mode I 0 20 Analog input current mA Fig 3 2 Current input characteristic of Q68AD G 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries Point 1 Set within the analog input range and digital output range for each input range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid use shown by the dotted lines in Fig 3 2 2 Do not input an analog input current of 30mA or less and 30mA or more The input elements may be damaged Set the offset gain values for the User range setting marked within a range in which satisfies the following conditions OVERVIEW 3 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a Gain value lt 20mA offset value 2 OmA b Use one of the following formulas according to the resolution mode to be set 1 Normal resolution mode Ga
27. Z fa 3 Set the offset and gain separately Set either Un G22 or Un G23 to 0 If both are set lt at the same time an offset gain setting mode error error code 500 occurs o ae 4 Refer to Section 4 6 for the details of the offset gain settings oS b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 o T 9 a 7 For Q68AD G information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 1 Channel set For Q66AD DG information of b6 to b15 is fixed at 0 0 Invalid E ge 926 lt a a QA 590 fe nam a 5 SRT lt i Zz ZO Elo EXa D94 o z Oo w Ww E 5 a g uw z9 a 2T OU f0 z E T w Ww l a 5 E 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 59 3 4 8 Offset gain setting mode offset gain specification Un G22 Un G23 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 9 Averaging process specification Un G24 Un G25 1 Specify whether to perform sampling processing or averaging processing time averaging count averaging moving average or primary delay filter for each channel 2 To validare the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 By default sampling processing Ox is set for all channels b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Un G24 Setting range CH1 to CH4 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Un G25 Setting range CH5 to CH8 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 For Q66AD DG information of b8 t
28. rot EGA limit value Warming N l 592 i occurrence ead CH1 process alarm upper limit value Un G50 b0 CH1 process alarm lower limit value Un G50 b1 PROGRAMMING CH2 process alarm upper limit value Un G50 b2 Warning output signal X8 3 i c When time or count averaging is specified this function is executed at intervals of z Z the preset averaging time or averaging count 55 When any other A D conversion system sampling processing moving average primary delay filter is specified this function is executed at intervals of the g sampling time 9 d To use the scaling function be sure to consider scale conversion before setting i the CHO process alarm upper lower limit value 2 oa 3 2 Function List 3 25 3 2 4 Warning output function 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Rate alarm MELSEC TA eries a If the range of change in the digital output value sampled at intervals of the rate alarm warning detection period is equal to or greater than the rate alarm upper limit value or is equal to or less than the rate alarm lower limit value the warning output flag rate alarm Un G51 and warning output signal X8 turn ON and the b ALM LED is lit to indicate the warning of the rate alarm If after the output of the warning the rate fell below the rate alarm upper limit value or rose above the rate alarm lower limit value and returned to within the set ting range 0 is stored into the bi
29. 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 Supported software packages Relation between the system containing the Q68AD G and software package is shown in the following table GX Developer or GX Works2 is required to use the A D converter module ee Software Version MELSEC TE eries GX Developer GX Configurator AD GX Works2 aoouaooaoicpu LSin9le CPU system Version REE Version 1 10N or later i Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later i Version 1 08J or later Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Single CP t ao2PH aospHcpu Single CPU system Version 8 68W or later Multiple CPU system Single CP t Q12PH Q25PHCPU 29S Seeley Version 7 10L or later Cannot be used Multiple CPU system eee Redundant CPU system Version 8 45X or later i i Q25PRHCPU z UJ U Single CP t E ak 7 ae a Version 8 76E or later ulti G u Version 2 09K or later Q02U Q03UD Single CPU system Q04UDH E EPOE Version 8 48A or later ulti QO6UDHCPU y 10UDH Single CPU syst Se sf aay a aon version 6 or later ulti O13UDHI Sin CPUs i Version 1 08J or later i g Y Version 8 62Q or later Q26UDHCPU Multiple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system QO6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or later Multiple CPU system Q26UDEHCPU 10UDEH Single CP t Q ue CRU SYStEM Version 8 76E or later Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system OUDE
30. 4 5 Section 5 1 5 4 Section 8 1 8 2 4 8 2 6 Appendix 1 1 1 2 1 3 Addition Appendix 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLT AGE DIRECTIVES Section 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLT AGE DIRECTIVES Section 1 1 2 1 to 2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 6 3 3 2 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 7 3 4 10 3 4 15 to 3 4 17 3 4 19 3 4 21 3 4 22 3 4 25 4 1 4 1 1 4 3 4 4 2 4 5 4 6 1 4 6 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 1 5 3 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 1 to 5 6 3 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 5 6 5 1 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 1 to 7 3 6 7 5 8 1 8 2 4 8 2 6 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Japanese Manual Version SH 080645 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series programmable controller Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity wi
31. If the module is mounted on the remote I O station execute save restoration in the other system mounted on the main base unit Save restoration cannot be executed in the other system mounted on the remote O station T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC KE eries 7 1 Online Module Change Conditions i The CPU MELSECNET H remote I O module A D converter module GX Developer and z base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change z 1 CPU The Process CPU or Redundant CPU are required z For precautions on multiple CPU system configuration refer to the QCPU User s lt Manual Multiple CPU System o For precautions on redundant system configuration refer to the QNPRHCPU User s be Manual Redundant System DO 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module P The module of function version D or later is necessary 5 3 3 A D converter module i The module of function version C or later is necessary g 4 GX Developer z GX Developer of Version 7 10L or later is necessary od GX Developer of Version 8 18U or later is required to perform an online 9 wo module change on the remote I O station a Be 5 Base unit 1 When the slim type main base unit Q3OSB is used an online module O change cannot be performed bz 2 When the power supply module unnecessary type extension base unit 28 Zz Q5LB is used online module change cannot be performed for the ES modules on all the base units connected 583 0 Z
32. M12 Processing at CH2 process L y R Processing at warning occurrence 7 alarm upper limit value O warning occurrence a M13 Pi i t CH2 n ht Processing at warning occurrence 7 alarm lower litt value warning occurrence M34 Processing at CH3 rate ht Processing at warning occurrence J alarm upper limit value Zz warning occurrence 2 it i Processing at CH3 rate 3 1 Processing at warning occurrence Y alarm lower limit value W w warning occurrence eo Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection z A a mov W8 k2 50 Read the input signal a E 5 error detection flag Q iL M50 a E t Processing at error detection O at CH1 input po signal error detection X22 X120 ht SET Y12F Turn ON the error clear request Y12F O Error code display and reset processing D E X23 X12F Ii EO wo K3Y30 J Output the error code in BCD D z9 awk Z SET Y12F Turn OFF the error clear request Y12F 2 a Y12F X120 X12F 7 5 50 t RST Y12F Turn ON the error clear request Y12F max e fp_ ND y oO z Z Point 3 To write the intelligent function module parameters set the target remote I O 9 station from Online Transfer setup on GX Developer They can be written by e Directly connecting GX Developer to the remote I O station Ww e Connecting GX Developer to another device such as a CPU module and a passing through the network 2 N z9 oz ZT OO 0 Z O O I za Ww faal 5
33. O ra e 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 34 6 5 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 35 MELSEC TE cries Programming example without using the utility package x Point The dedicated instructions used for reading writing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module on a remote I O station REMTO and REMFR are the execution type for which several scans are needed Therefore transmissions of the execution results are not synchronized with the I O signal operations When reading a digital output value on an A D converter module after changing the operating condition during operation be sure to read the A D conversion completed flag buffer memory address 10 at the same time Also for the case of changing the operating condition insert an interlock to prevent the execution of the REMFR instruction 1 Operating GX Developer CPU parameter setting Network type MNET H Remote master Starting I O No 0000H Network No 1 Total stations ei Mode Online Network range assignment StationNo ite Y x Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End 256 0100 0IFF 256 0000 OOFF 256 0100 IFF 256 oooo oOFF Y M station gt R station M station lt R station M station gt R station M station lt R station a Cot E E Lh es ee aa ee Ponts Stat Evd f Poms Stat End Ports Stat
34. O z S Table3 9 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG 1 5 zo i a Description Default 1 Reference 2 6 ipti u Hexadecimal Decimal ii i Ze On 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 003FH RIW 2 Section 3 4 2 CH1 Average time Average number of times 2 1H 1 0 Rw a Moving average Time constant settings A CH2 Average time Average number of times p E 2H 2 f l 0 Rw lt Moving average Time constant settings e CH3 Average time Average number of times x 8 3H 3 i i l 0 RIW a Moving average Time constant settings p oO Section 3 4 3 CH4 Average time Average number of times 4u 4 l f l 0 Rw Moving average Time constant settings CH5 Average time Average number of times a 5H 5 i i 0 Rw lt Moving average Time constant settings 2 g CH6 Average time Average number of times P A E S 6H 6 i i 0 RW Zou Moving average Time constant settings awe 590 7H 7 m 2 m to to System area zaa 9H 9 AH 10 A D conversion completed flag 0 R Section 3 4 4 a BH 11 CH1 Digital output value 0 R o T Cu 12 CH2 Digital output value 0 R g 2 Du 13 CH3 Digital output value 0 R ag a Section 3 4 5 8 Ex 14 CH4 Digital output value 0 R ie Fu 15 CH5 Digital output value 0 R E 59 10H 16 CH6 Digital output value 0 R 11H 17 System area 12H 18 13H 19 Error code 0 R Section 3 4 6 g 14 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 0 R ing range Section 3 4 7 15H 21 Setting range CH5 CH6 0 R g 16H 22 Offset gain setting mode of
35. Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 512 256 2 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 512 256 2 Q02PH Q06PH Q12PH Q25PHCPU 512 256 Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 512 256 3 QO0UJ Q00U Q01UCPU 512 256 D z Q02UCPU 2048 1024 n O Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH 4096 2048 Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU 2 Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU Not available Not available 2 MELSECNET H remote I O station 512 256 S mE For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed to the MELSECNET D H remote I O station configure the settings in GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings for all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the limit of a the MELSECNET H remote I O station 2 Calculate the total number of parameter settings separately for the initial setting and ot for the auto refresh setting 250 The number of parameters that can be set for one module in GX Configurator AD is 596 as shown below Oo m Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting Q68AD G 6 Fixed 36 Max Q66AD DG 10 Fixed 28 Max Example Counting the number of parameter settings in Auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww w O rs x lt 2 a q Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q68AD G Module side Module side transfer PLC side LS Setting item Buffer sze
36. Section 3 4 8 17H 23 Offset gain setting mode gain specification 0 R W 18H 24 Averaging process specification CH1 to CH4 0 RIW 2 W Section 3 4 9 gt 19H 25 Averaging process specification CH5 to CH8 0 RIW 2 Q 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled 4 R Read enabled a Z W Write enabled oo 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memory writing condition Z J Y9 x9 O f MOV 2K eK H Q Writing Operating Operating 7 request condition condition L setting Seang m request completed l ae lag_____ 2 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 43 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 44 Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 2 6 M ELSEG seres 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment Address Description Default RW Reference Hexadecimal Decimal 1AH 26 to to System area 1DH 29 1E 30 CH1 Maximum value 0 R W 1FH 31 CH1 Minimum value 0 R W 20H 32 CH2 Maximum value 0 R W 21H 33 CH2 Minimum value 0 R W 22H 34 CH3 Maximum value 0 R W 23H 35 CH3 Minimum value 0 R W 24H 36 CH4 Maximum value 0 R W 25H 37 CH4 Minimum value 0 R W A 26n 38 CH5 Maximum value 0 awe jee 27H 39 CH5 Minimum value 0
37. Set data Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Mode switching 0 Switching to normal mode S 1 Switching to offset gain setting mode Binary 16 bits The setting of any other value results in switching to offset gain setting mode 1 Function Switches the mode of the A D converter module e Normal mode to offset gain setting mode the offset gain setting mode flag XA turns ON e Offset gain setting mode to normal mode the offset gain setting mode flag XA turns OFF Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 2 Appendix 1 1 G P OFFGAN x a z m a a lt INDEX APPENDIX MELSEC TE eries Point 1 When the offset gain setting mode is switched to the normal mode Module ready X0 turns from OFF to ON Note that initial setting processing will be executed if there is a sequence program that makes initial setting when Module ready X0 turns ON 2 When one mode is switched to the other the normal mode is switched to the offset gain setting mode or the offset gain setting mode is switched to the normal mode the A D converter module suspends A D conversion and switches OFF the power supply to the 2 wire transmitter To resume A D conversion and power supply to the 2 wire transmitter turn ON the operating condition setting request Y9 after the mode is switched to the normal mode 2 Operation error No errors
38. System S 34 CH8 user range settings offset value System S 35 CH8 user range settings gain value System App 9 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR APPENDIX MELSEC Led series Control data of Q66AD DG Device Item Set data Setting range Set by x S System area S Stores the status when the instruction is a S 1 Completion status complete System k 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion O System area S 3 S 4 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 5 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value System fan S 6 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S S 7 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 8 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 9 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 10 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 11 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 12 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 13 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 14 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 15 CH6 Industrial shipment settings
39. The A D conversion completed flag XE turns ON when conversion for all A D conversion enabled channels is complete 2 When the operating condition setting request Y9 is set to ON the flag returns to the default setting of 0 and changes to 1 when A D conversion is complete b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 For Q68AD G information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 1 A D conversion completed For Q66AD DG information of b6 to b15 is fixed at 0 0 A D conversion in progress or not used Setting example of Q68AD G When all A D conversions of conversion enabled channels 1 and 2 are completed 0003H is stored into the buffer memory address 10 Un G10 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO ofofo o o of ofofo o 0 o o fo 1 1 o003s CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 0 0 3 Setting example of QE6AD DG When all A D conversions of conversion enabled channels 3 and 4 are completed OOOCH is stored into the buffer memory address 10 Un G10 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o o JE 1 0 O 000CH CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 3 While the operating condition setting request Y9 is ON 0 is stored in the bits for all channels of the A D conversion completed flag 4 Use this area or the A D conversion competed flag XE as an interlock to read out the digital output value 3 56 3 4 Buffer Memory
40. The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed in the offset gain setting mode 162 The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed consecutively 163 App 11 Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed for the model that differs from the model for which the G P OGLOAD instruction had been exe cuted Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices APPENDIX MELSEC Lal series 3 Program example Program that restores the offset gain setting to the A D converter module mounted in the position of I O No X Y10 to X Y1F when M11 is turned OFF APPENDIX Control data setting m ter itis Offset gain value restoration Ul D100 M30 Dedicated instruction GP OGSTOR a 9 SART a INDEX Performs processing at abnormal completion Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 12 Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR APPENDIX MELSEC series Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade The A D converter has been upgraded with new functions and specifications The functions available for use of the A D converter module vary with the first five digits of product number Also use the GX Configurator AD whose version number is compatible one or later 1 Q68AD G App 1 Q68AD G Applicable version Added or changed First 5 digits Reference Description GX Configurator p function of product section AD number When
41. The converted value of digital analog conversion can be confirmed according to the m tilt of the graph based on the offset gain setting Operating procedure Z Monitor test screen Offset gain setting Conversion characteristic 2 Setting screen Z0 DE O Conversion characteristic nO Analog Range setting Analog Current Range setting E O Offset Gain setting 3 Offset valuefmA L 4004 i Gain value m4 ee 20 00 24 Range settings Zz Analog Digital conversion 2 2 Analog gt Digital Oo cP C Digital gt Analog 9 4 z Analog value m4 z a wy QA Q Digital value E 9 g nam Conversion Explanation of items 1 Items displayed on the screen I O characteristic diagram Displays the I O conversion characteristic to the prepared offset gain setting e4 fo lt toa lt gt lt 0 hi ar fo S x lt lo a q 2 Setting details D Zz Analog Range setting Z Analog Select the type of the analog signal input voltage or current When the target module is the Q66AD DG Current only can be selected Range setting Make selection from Normal resolution or High resolution W Offset Gain setting 5 Q Offset value Enter an offset value to display the I O characteristic diagram A Gain value Enter a gain value to display the I O characteristic diagram 5 OO Analog Digital conversion Select a conversion type shown below for confirming the correspondence between an analo
42. Z condition of the following I O signals OO Buffer memory writing condition ie oh nl ti mov i i Y 2 ened condition condition 5 i ieg ae G ERR lag_____ o 3 E 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 45 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 4 6 Acdress Description Default R W Reference ripti u Hexadecimal Decimal 72H 114 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIW 2 73 115 CH8 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 2 i eee RW Section 3 4 19 74H 116 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIW 2 75H 117 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 76H 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 TTH 119 CH2 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W 2 78H 120 CH3 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W 2 79H 121 CH4 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 i 3 Section 3 4 20 7AH 122 CH5 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 7BH 123 CH6 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W 2 7CH 124 CH7 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 7DH 125 CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W 2 7EH 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 7FH 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 80H 128 CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 2 81H 129 CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 2 824 13
43. completed flag 1 2 This signal is used as an interlock condition to turn ON OFF the offset gain change request YC when the offset gain value is changed Refer to Section 4 6 for the offset gain setting gt Performed by the A D converter module Performed by the sequence program Offset gain change completed flag N XC Offset gain change request YC 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Device No Signal Name Description 1 This signal turns ON when the maximum value minimum value stored at any of the buffer memory addresses 30 to 45 Un G30 to Un G45 is reset by turning ON the Maximum value minimum value reset request YD i gt Performed by the A D converter module O Performed by the sequence program Maximum value Maximum and minimum values minimum value storage area z XD Un G30 to Un G45 reset completed lt flag n o Maximum value minimum value E L reset request YD a Q Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD A 1 This signal turns ON when conversion for all of the channels that are conversion enabled has been completed T 2 This signal or the A D conversion completed flag Un G10 is used as an interlock condition to E read out the digital out
44. condition setting completed flag X9 turns OFF 4 After confirming that the operating condition setting completed flag X9 has turned OFF turn OFF the operating condition setting request Y9 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Set value Mode to be switched to i Normal mode 0964H 4144H Offset gain setting mode 0964H F E oO Point If any value other than the above is written mode switching is not performed and z only the operating condition is changed z oe 250 Bae 53900 3 4 24 Save data classification setting Un G200 Q68AD G only 1 This area is used to restore the User range settings offset gain values when the we module is replaced online ge Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change as Te 2 Specify whether the offset gain values to be saved restored are voltages or currents 5 68 when saving restoring the offset gain values of the user range setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 z Information of b8 to b15 is fixed to 0 1 Current Q 0 Voltage ao Point 2 Refer to Section 4 6 for the offset gain value setting method S oz Zak OO oO Z O O a i z O E 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 73 3 4 23 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 25 Factory default and User range settings offset gain value Un G202 to Un G233 1 The areas are used to restore
45. s CH1 Initial setting ZA Module information 2 Og Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q66AD DG e Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable zu CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling z CH1 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings lt Average time 40 5000ms Average number of a times 4 500times G Move average 2 60times Linear delay filter 10 5000ms CH1 A D conversion starting time setting 2 wire transmitter g CH1 Warming output setting Process alarm setting Disable Details S Select input A Setting range Enable w Disable HEG a ZE i OO Make text file End setup Cancel 0 Z E O O I n W a 2 O v4 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 24 6 4 2 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSECTEY eries b Auto refresh setting Refer to Section 5 5 Set the digital output values warning output flags input signal error detection flags and error codes of CH1 to CH3 Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q66AD DG Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer word count PLC side Transfer 7 Device direction CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value CH5 Digital output value CHE
46. 10 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries 2 Operating procedure Start the settings with GX Developer I O assignment setting screen it aA W Z a I O assignment setting screen e aieeaa Set the following for the slot in which the A D PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS 1 PLC RAS 2 Device Program 7 Bai He ere converter module is mounted 2 1 0 Assignment EATR a 5s ren The type setting is required set other items as 2 f t Intelli Spoints i be needed a 2 2 Tea ne ofa z Type Select intelli 5 z z z gt GS irons alte cans ove E Model name Enter the module model name 32 1 Power model name Extension cable Slots aie Points Select 16 points peices Start Enter the start I O number for no TE the A D converter module 5 12 Slot Default n Ustat aterm ppoe U ooma perico Detailed Specify the control PLC for the 3 Acknowledge XY assignment Mulinle CPU settings Defaut Check End Cancel setting Al D converter module 5 It is unnecessary to set the a Error time output mode or H W error time PLC operation mode since these settings are invalid for the A D converter module z O lt a wi a fo Ww a O Ts wi m n Ww a 2 fa W Q fe a o b Switch setting f
47. 2 bs fie m 5EH 94 CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RW 2 a a SFu 95 CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 a 89 60H 96 CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIW 2 Oo m 61H 97 CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 62H 98 CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIW 2 E 63H 99 CH4 Process alarm lower upper int value 0 RIW 2 Seina Aao 5 E 64H 100 CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIW 2 2 65H 101 CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 k m 66H 102 CH5 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIW 2 2 67H 103 CH5 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 E 52 68H 104 CH5 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIW 2 69H 105 CH5 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 GAH 106 CH6 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIw 2 6Bu 107 CH6 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 g 6CH 108 CH6 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 z 6Du 109 CH6 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 E 6E 110 CH7 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 2 6FH 111 CH7 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 70H 112 CH7 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIw 2 71H 113 CH7 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 T 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled gt R Read enabled 2 W Write enabled T fo 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write
48. 2 core twisted shielded wire for the power wire 2 Shows input resistance 3 To connect with the 2 wire transmitter be sure to connect to P and I CHK 4 Always ground the shield of the wire of each channel 9 5 The check terminals CHK CHK are used to check the amount of input in mA in relation to the 2 wire transmitter output fe This can be checked since analog inputs of 4 to 20mA are converted to analog outputs of 1 to 5V z The relationship of this conversion can be expressed by the following formula m Analog input mA Analog output V x 2500 g output V 1000 6 Do not connect any devices to the P terminal because the 2 wire transmitter power supply is M always on A S WO eeeeeeececeoeoeeaos eee eee eoeeeeeeoeoee seoeoeeeeeoeeee eceoeaoe ee eee zZz 2E The Q66AD DG needs to powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compli Se ance to the specification accuracy 0 Therefore power on 30 minutes prior to offset gain setting or after online module Z change a T eeeeseeeeeaeseoeoevoeeeeeoeoeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee H a fe ra e 4 4 Wiring 4 4 2 External wiring 4 9 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION M ELSEG Q series 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting The intelligent function module switches are set using the I O assignment settings of GX Developer 1 Setting item The intelligent function module switches consist of switch
49. 25 E24 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 0 R W E3H 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 0 R W E44 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 0 R W E5x 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 0 R W E6 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 0 R W E7 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 0 R W E8x 232 _ CH8 User range settings offset value 0 R W E9 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 0 R W 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memory writing condition i Y9 X9 t Mov ek H Writing Operating Operating request condition condition setting seting request completed tea ntcsiel lag__ 3 Areas used to restore the User range settings offset gain values when the module is replaced online Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG a gt Point i Do not write data from system area or sequence program to the buffer memory 2 area where writing is disabled Doing so may cause malfunction
50. 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 3 3 1 1 Performance specifications list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series Table3 2 Performance Specifications of Q66AD DG Item Specifications Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 42A Weight 0 22kg 1 Accuracy of offset gain setting at ambient temperature Q66AD DG needs to be powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compliance to the specification accuracy 2 digit indicates a digital value 3 Accuracy per temperature change of 1 C Example Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30 C 0 1 reference accuracy 0 00714 C temperature coefficient x 5 C temperature change difference 0 1357 4 User range setting is 2 to 24mA 5 The cycle in which A D conversion values are updated 6 The time required for an input signal to reach the A D converter inside the Q66AD DG 7 Current value indicates value of instant input current that does not break module inner electrical resistance 8 For details on I O conversion characteristics refer to Section3 1 2 2 9 The maximum resolution for the user range setting See the user s manual for the CPU module being used for general specifications of the A D converter modules 3 4 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 1 Performance specifications list 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic The I O conversion characteristic represents the angle formed by a straight line conn
51. 5V age 10 to 10V 10V ov 10V Analog value whens qigrtal value i Analog value set as an Analog value set as a User range setting e 4000 normal resolution mode 12000 high resolution mode offset value by the user gain value by the user 0 to 20mA OmA OmA 20mA 4 to 20mA 4mA 4mA 20mA Cur 4 to 20mA extended mode 4mA 4mA 20mA rent Analog value when the digital value is Analog value set as an Analog value set as a User range setting 4000 normal resolution mode offset value by the User sin valie By the ser 12000 high resolution mode y 3 J Table3 11 The lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range Q66AD DG Input Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value 0 to 20mA OmA 20mA 4 to 20mA 4mA 20mA 4 to 20mA extended mode 4mA 20mA Anal t User range setting Analog value set as an offset value by the user ds Og Yas Serco gain value by the user 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 22 CH input signal error detection setting value CH Input signal error detection lower limit setting val 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 23 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 1 Set values for the mode desired to be switched to OVERVIEW 2 After setting the values turning the operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON switches to that mode 3 When mode switching is performed this area is cleared to zero and the operating
52. 6 32 6 5 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 33 M ELSEG A series 2 Operating the utility package Operate the utility package on the remote I O station side Set the following in the Intelligent function module parameter setting module select area e Start I O No 20 e Module type A D Conversion Module Module model name Q66AD DG a Initial setting Refer to Section 5 4 Set the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 Refer to Section 6 5 for the settings CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0020 Module model name OQB664D DG Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling CH1 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Average time 40 5000ms Average number of times 4 500times Move average 2 60times Linear delay filter 10 5000ms CH1 A D conversion starting time setting 2 wire transmitter CH1 Warning output setting Process alarm setting Disable Details Select input l Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup Cancel b Auto refresh setting Refer to Section 5 5 Set the digital output values warning output flags input signal error detection flags and error codes of CH1 to CH3 Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module St
53. Module error 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure Stop monitor Mode System monitor C Online module change Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Product Inf List Detailed inf of power supply Close 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries b Click the Execution button to enable a module change i Online module change z Operation Target module m Module change execution 1 0 address 000H 2 z S Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart 7 Change module selection completed 6 Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the 2 2 intelligent function module 5 Zz lt O nO Cancel 2 O E If the following error screen appears click the OK button dismount the module S L as is and mount a new module 9 D MELSOFT series GX Developer z The target module didn t respond 2 The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Ss gg S 30 By ER imi Bee c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the connector and dismount the module a Point 5 i lt i Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the Ez module being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED axe E oO will not be lit
54. Module model name Q684D G Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer word count CH1 Digital output value 1 CH2 Digital output value PLC side Transfer Device direction CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value CHE Digital output value CH7 Digital output value CH8 Digital output value il 1 1 1 CH5 Digital output value 1 1 1 i 1 CH1 Maximum value Make text file End setup Cancel Explanation of items 1 Items Module side Buffer size Displays the size of the buffer memory for the setting item that can be transferred fixed at one word Module side Transfer word Displays the number of words to transfer count the CPU device from the head device fixed at one word Transfer direction lt indicates that data is written from the device to the buffer memory gt indicates that data is read from the buffer memory to the device PLC side Device Enter a CPU module side device that is to be automatically refreshed Applicable devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When using bit devices X Y M L or B set a number that can be divided by 16 points examples X10 Y120 M16 etc Also buffer memory data are stored in a 16 point area starting from the specified device number For example if X10 is entered data are stored in X10 to X1F 5 16 5 5 Auto Refresh Setting 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Con
55. Operation check before control start v 4 Operation check Click the Cancel button of GX Developer to leave the online mode Yy Conduct an operation test on the new module using Device test of GX Developer or Monitor test of GX Configurator y Module operates according to test operation Perform user range restoration processing by write to buffer memory at this point Y XO Module ready turns ON Operation check completed 5 Resumption of control Operate GX Developer to Start is made when XO turns 7 3 1 Access to the intelligent function module device U O G O is included resume the online module change mode and click the Execution button to resume control from OFF to ON Operation is performed according to the initial setting sequence 2 2 In the absence of the operation marked 2 the operation of the intelligent function module is the operation performed prior to that 3 If the module is changed online to a module that has no extended mode for analog input range under the following input range settings an intelligent function module switch error will occur Also the analog input range extended mode cannot be used in that case Q68AD G 4 to 20mA extended mode Ay Q66AD DG 4 to 20mA extended mode 2 wire transmitter input Ay 1 to 5V extended mode By 4 to 20mA exten
56. P OGSTOR Restores the offset gain values of the user range setting stored sensei i3 ix 1 in the CPU to the A D converter module pe Point When the module is mounted to a MELSECNET H remote station the dedicated instructions cannot be used 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal devices File register Constant i Go eee 2 X Y M L F V B T ST C D W R ZR 1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Designation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C App 1 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices APPENDIX MELSEC Led series Appendix 1 1 G P OFFGAN Switches the mode of the A D converter module Normal mode to offset gain setting mode offset gain setting mode to normal mode Usable devices eal device Link direct device Intelligent eal stem user JOO function constant u Set data bi File Index reg register module ieee Word device Ister EEI unico S Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G OFFGAN G OFFGAN Un S Command GP OFFGAN GP OFFGAN Un S I Set data
57. Processing at CH2 process ty Processing at warning occurrence alarm lower limit value lt x warning occurrence a M34 Processing at CH3 rate 9 t Processing at warning occurrence alarm upper limit value warning occurrence oO M35 _ Processing at CH3 rate t Processing at warning occurrence j alarm low r limit value warning occurrence wW E a S WO zZ oz CS a OO 0 Z O O E N w m O ra ke 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 28 6 4 3 Programming example without using the utility package PROGRAMMING MELSEC Asri Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection SM400 vo HR A G49 K2M50 Read the input signal error detection flag M50 b A S Processing at error detection ER 9 at CHI on put X11 xoc SET YOF Turn ON the error clear request YF Error code display and reset processing x12 XOF Output the error code in BCD Turn ON the error clear request YF Turn OFF the error clear request YF 6 29 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 4 3 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG i 1 System configuration z gt Remote master station Network No 1 Remote I O station Station No 1 e QJ71LP21 25 QY10 X20 to X2F QY10 Y30 to Y3F S H 05 nO 2
58. Q66AD DG only If an excessive current flows into the module due to a short circuit of the wiring the short circuit protection circuit limits the current to within 25 to 35mA protecting the module Analog input check by check terminals Q66AD DG only Measurement of a voltage at the check terminals allows the mA of the 2 wire transmitter output to be checked without the wiring being disconnected 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 6 High accuracy The reference accuracy Tis as high as 0 1 and the temperature coefficient is as high as 71 4ppm C 1 Accuracy of offset gain setting at ambient temperature OVERVIEW 2 Accuracy per temperature change of 1 C Example Accuracy when the temperature varies from 25 to 30 C a 0 1 reference accuracy 0 00714 C temperature coefficient x 5 C 2 temperature variation difference 0 1357 Z0 H N 7 Changing the input range AE The input range 3 can easily be set from the GX Developer 3 Input range refers to the type of offset gain settings The most frequently used range is set as the default but the user can also set the offset gain 2 fe 4 T 8 A D conversion system g There are the following five A D conversion systems D D a Sampling processing Analog input values are converted into digital values one by one on a channel z i fe basis and the digital output value is output at every conversion 5 N W W b Avera
59. Scaling upper limit value upper limit value Analig input current mA ie Fee eee ee eee ee ge eee Analig input a current mA Scaling 0 lower limit value 7 1 b When using the user range setting for the input range Set a value corresponding to the gain or offset value to the scaling upper or lower limit value respectively Scaling lower limit value 0 4 Example 1 Gain value OmA Offset value Example 2 Gain value OV Offset value 24mA Q66AD DG 10V Q68AD G Digital output value Digital output value Scaling upper limit value Sealing lijbeseceeeetesoees upper limit value a or lower limit value Sa Analig input current mA Analig input current mA DaS Cage ge ne er ne eres 4 Scaling lower limit value 0 3 30 3 2 Function List 3 2 6 Scaling Function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 5 How to calculate a scaling value is explained below a When using the factory default setting for the input range W 1 Input range 0 to10V O to 5V 1 to 5V O to 20mA 4 to 20mA 1 to 5V Extended mode or 4 to 20mA Extended mode Dx x SH SL Scaling value SEA TSU ae 6 DMAX 5 2 Input range 10 to 10V o ae DZ Scaling value a eis Pai Do DMAX DMIN 2 2 Zz Dx Digital output value Dmax The maximum digital output value in the input range being used r DIN The minimum digital output
60. System S 11 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 12 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 13 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 14 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 15 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 16 to System area _ S 19 S 20 CH1 user range settings offset value System S 21 CH1 user range settings gain value System S 22 CH2 user range settings offset value System S 23 CH2 user range settings gain value System S 24 CH3 user range settings offset value System S 25 CH3 user range settings gain value System S 26 CH4 user range settings offset value System S 27 CH4 user range settings gain value System S 28 CH5 user range settings offset value System S 29 CH5 user range settings gain value System S 30 CH6 user range settings offset value System S 31 CH6 user range settings gain value System S 32 to System area _ 8 35 2 Setting is not necessary If setting is made the offset gain values will not be read properly Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 6 Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD APPENDIX MELSEC TA eries 1 Functions a Reads
61. Z Q ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 8 Usage of FB 5 31 5 8 1 Outline 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE cries 5 8 2 Paste an FB to a sequence program Purpose of operation Paste an FB in order to use it with a sequence program Operation procedure Switch the lt lt Project gt gt tab into the lt lt FB gt gt tab on GX Developer and drag amp drop the FB to be used onto the sequence program Before pasting i MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project LO Edit mode MAIN 124 Step EEK T Project Edt Find Replace Convert View Online Diagrostics Toos Window Help BEE olsa a eel Aala sll ala Ble Blobalvanables x ad a Cee Ane eee eee al fe miels Eeke m a PETET a Readr aam Fosan ow m After pasting jt MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project LD Edit mode MAIN 124 Step J Broject Edit FindfReplece Convert view Online Tools osal a a o Alala s s ele Fale Global varabes gt a delaleti wel te 35126 tel We Me tL e ol a Spe Ole mles lol 12 ele Fea ale ell esd eee Rede Ele le E TASES IERT a a 89 fem T EB Hea
62. as the default setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 oO Zz Fa 9 Input signal error detection extended setting Input signal error detection setting ie 0 Same upper limit value lower limit value 0 Enable 1 Disable 1 Different upper limit value lower limit value k I W For Q66AD DG information of b6 b7 b14 b15 is fixed at 0 a oz CS a OO 0 Z O O a N W a O ra 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 61 3 4 10 CH maximum value minimum value storage area Un G30 to Un G45 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 62 MELSEC TA eries Setting example of Q68AD G If the following setting is performed store 01EAH into Un G47 e The channel 1 3 and 5 specified for input signal error detection are set to 0 enabled e The channel 1 specified for input signal error detection extended setting is set to 1 different value of lower and upper limit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE bS5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 01EAH CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 1 E A Setting example of QE6AD DG If the following setting is performed store 0215H into Un G47 e The channel 2 4 and 6 specified for input signal error detection are set to 0 enabled e The channel 2 specified for input signal error detection extended setting is set to 1 different value of lower and upper limit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5
63. ate ett ela iar 2 4mA Input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error detection upper limit value 20 8mA 2 08mA Input signal error detection lower limit value 3 24 3 2 3 M ELSEG seres 2 To detect input signal errors at an upper limit value only e Input signal error detection extended setting 1 different upper lower limit values e Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 100 10 0 e Input signal error detection lower limit setting value 251 input signal error detection disabled Error f 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA 16mA Gain value Offset value 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA No error detected 3 To detect input signal errors at different upper and lower limit values Input signal error detection extended setting 1 different upper lower limit values e Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 5 0 e Input signal error detection lower limit setting value 120 12 0 oc 8 ZS 0 8mA 5 0 of 16mA 16mA Gain value Offset value 1 92mA 12 0 of 16mA 3 2 Function List Input signal error detection function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 2 4 Warning output function 1 Process alarm OVERVIEW a If the detected digital output value rose to or above the process alarm upper upper limit value or fell to or below the proces
64. be utilized to create user documents GX Developer GX Configurator AD Personal computer Turn OFF all Y signals that were turned ON by a sequence program 3 E A Intelligent function module parameters B Data saved by Make text file Fig5 1 Correlation chart for data created with the utility package Steps 1 to 3 shown in Fig5 1 are performed as follows 1 From GX Developer select Project Open project Save Save as 2 On the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Intelligent function module parameter Open parameters Save parame ters 3 From GX Developer select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Intelligent function module parameters Alternatively from the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 5 8 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 3 1 Common utility package operations UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC Le series 5 3 2 Operation overview a at z Screen for selecting a target intelligent mi GX Developer screen function module 5 D Edit mode MAIN 124 Step Intelligent function module utility D MELSE
65. characteristics maximum resolution 4 to 20mA AUA 4334A Z 4 to 20mA es int 3000 to ane od Extended mode a 13500 ean oes i i z2 Users range setting 0 to 4000 1 37UA9 0 to 12000 1 33 UN tO i 500 fe Accuracy 0 1 i i i Accuracy Reference accuracy Normal resolution mode 4digit 2 jeki 10 High resolution mode 12digit 2 2 digital 7 O output value Temperature coefficient 3 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C p lt Sampling cycle 10ms channel 9 3 a Response time 20ms Z 6 x Ixa Absolute maximum output 30mA7 E58 ete 7 Dielectric withstand Insulation Specific isolated area Isolation method A voltage resistance Between I O terminal and o programmable controller 500VAC rms 1min Isolation ower suppl 500VDC Bet o ra T t ieee 10M amp Wi inpu gnp isolation 1000VAC rms 1min amp or 9 channels more m Between external supply 500VAC rms 1min power and analog input Maximum number of writes to flash w Up to 50 000 times memory a Number of I O occupied points 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points 2 if External wiring connection system 40 pin connector o 9 a lt A E 0 3mm AWG22 or less for A6CON1 A6CON4 Page Applicable wire size oo 0 088mm to 0 24mm AWG28 to 24 for AGCON2 External device connection connector A6CON1 AGCON2 AGCON4 sold separately 24VDC 20 15 Z Ripple spike within 500mVp p 2 External supply power n T Inrush current 5 0A within 400us A 0 36A a fe v4
66. delay filter set in Un G1 to Un G8 aes the time constant setting to within T0 to 3203 is outside the range of 10 to 5000 o Also the set value must be 10 x No of channels o O indicates the channel number set incorrectly i zZ used or greater 2 In the CHO rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Reset the CHO rate alarm upper lower limit value S LL 340 Un G141 setting Lower limit 2 Upper limit Un G126 to Un G141 so that the lower limit value 9 J indicates the channel number set incorrectly is smaller than the upper limit value 5 350 The conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter R r oo mana Q66AD DG UN G78 to Un G83 is outside the range of 0 to 32767 eset the conversion Starting ume setting Wore A wire transmitter to within O to 32767 only O indicates the channel number set incorrectly Ee The offset value is equal to or greater than the gain value at the na cP f Reset so that the offset value becomes smaller ara 40 time of user range setting or user range restoration i Z50 than the gain value Eon O indicates the error causing channel number 2 Q x A The offset gain channels were set at the same time during offset Reset the contents of buffer memory addresses 22 i amp m S0 and gain value settings or both were set to 0 and 23 Un G22 and Un G23 f4 Be Su Q0 awk Zz ae I2 592 0 zZ 3 f2 f0 fe ia A W E 3 a S Lu z ri Z fo ausXo 0
67. detection status and processing at error detection alarm lower limit value no smago _ warning occurrence Zz 2 REMER aL K5 K1 H2 K49 D8 K1 M330 J Read the input signal i M330 M331 D8 0 error detection flag T iN Processing at error detection Processing at CH1 input O signal error detection ma X22 X12C oO 1 sar Y12F 4 Turn ON the error clear W Error code display and reset processing request YF Bs X12F 2P REMFR gi K6 K1 H2 K19 D9 K1 M340 7 Read the error code M340 M341 Ey iF eco p9 x330 J Output the error code in BCD 5 X23 X12F E i ser v z J Turn ON the error clear a 2 5 request YF w Ww Y12F x12C X12F ara 4 A rst Y12F q Turn OFF the error clear 250 request YF a A 2 a a 500 MCR NO J om g wo i nom Eso 1 i a we S 33 ne oz EG Eo ayn Epo 2O e oO z lt a 0 e a a W zi a S WO zZ J zapa OO 0 Z E O O E N W a O ra E 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 38 6 5 2 Programming example without using the utility package T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series 7 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE To perform online module change read the following manual e QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Perform an online module change by operating GX Developer 2 To ensure ease of offset gain re setting there is a user range save restoration function that is performed by executing the dedicated
68. detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 D z 9AH 154 CH5 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 Be 9Bu 155 CH6 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 9CH 156 CH7 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 P 9Du 157 CH8 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 pE dss Mod itchi tti 0 Section 3 4 23 3 ode switching settin ection 3 4 2 OF x 159 esi a AOH 160 u to to System area ui C7H 199 C8H 200 Save data classification setting 0 R W Section 3 4 24 C9H 201 System area i z CAH 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 0 R W 9 Y a CBH 203 CH1 Factory default gain value 0 R W k T a 7 590 CCH 204 CH2 Factory default offset value 0 R W fe oom CDH 205 CH2 Factory default gain value 0 R W CEx 206 CH3 Factory default offset value 0 R W fid CFu 207 CH3 Factory default gain value 0 R W w E DO 208 CH4 Factory default offset value 0 R W 3 D14 209 CH4 Factory default gain value 0 R W Pe Section 3 4 25 gt O D2 210 CH5 Factory default offset value 0 R W Eo 3 ESG D3H 211 CH5 Factory default gain value 0 R W 254 D4H 212 CH6 Factory default offset value 0 R W D5H 213 CH6 Factory default gain value 0 R W D6 214 CH7 Factory default offset value 0 R W 9 D7H 215 CH7 Factory default gain value 0 R W T D8H 216 CH8 Factory default offset value 0 R
69. flag Un G10 of the corresponding channel turns OFF By bringing the analog input value within the setting range and then turning ON the error clear request YF the input signal error detection flag Un G49 and input signal error detection signal XC turn OFF 3 2 Function List 3 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold function 3 SPECIFICATIONS M ALS eG cries 4 When the analog input value returns to within the setting range A D conversion is resumed independently of whether the input signal error detection flag Un G49 and input signal error detection signal XC are reset or not the A D conversion completed z flag Un G10 of the corresponding channel turns ON again after the first updating z The ERR LED remains flickering A Analog input value Zz z Error detection 7 s Upper limit value X Input value ro CH1 analog normal ao input value Lower limit 3 value z l E lt 9 m D 5 Time CH1 input signal error detection flag Un G49 b0 6 ow Input signal error detection signal bs fie m XC Z20 tow 335 CH1 A D conversion completed flag Bes Un G10 b0 ee Error clear request YF ng we 28 5 This function is executed at every sampling processing 9 ES Zo 6 Perform the following procedure to use this function Eo o 1 Set the input signal error detection setting value for the corresponding channel 2 Enable the A D conversion of the corresponding channel
70. instruc tion is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the G P OGSTOR instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program CN CFF G OGSTOR instruction FS Completion device D CFF Status display device CFF ra a Execution completion of i the G OGSTOR instructio l Io SGSSSSESSE S r ON Abnormal completion Normal completion at completion D 1 A D conversion ON 41 ON completed flag XE CFF 1 scan ON m When the G P OGSTOR instruction is executed A D conversion is not performed After the com pletion device D turns ON A D conversion starts the A D conversion value is stored into the buffer memory and the A D conversion completed flag XE then turns ON c When the offset gain values are restored the reference accuracy falls to about less than three times of the accuracy before that 2 Operation error In any of the following cases an error occurs and the corresponding error code is stored into the completion status area S 1 Error code 161 Case resulting in operation error
71. instruction or read write from to buffer memory Point 1 Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmable controller will not malfunction 2 To prevent an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online 3 After the module has failed data may not be saved properly Referring to Section 3 4 23 therefore prerecord the data to be saved offset gain values of the industrial shipment settings and user range settings in the buffer memory 4 It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual system in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules by checking the following e Means of cutting off the connection to external devices and its configuration are correct e Switching ON OFF does not bring any undesirable effect 5 Do not install remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction Note The dedicated instruction cannot be executed during an online module change When using the dedicated instruction to execute save restoration therefore execute save restoration in the other system If the other system is unavailable execute restoration by performing write to the buffer memory 1
72. limit value lower limit value Rate alarm warning detection period Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection lower limit setting value Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value lower limit value Setting parameters in the Initial setting screen can omit parameter settings in sequence programs Operating procedure Start I O No 1 Module type gt Module model name Initial setting gt CHU Initial setting 4 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal Setting screen CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q684D G CH1 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Average time 40 5000ms Average number of times 4 500times Move average 2 60times Linear delay filter 10 5000ms CH1 Warning output setting Process alarm setting Disable Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling Details Select input Setting range nable Disable Make text file End setup Cancel 5 4 Initial Setting 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries
73. module O Module change execution 1 0 address oooH Installation confirmation Moike nae eee Status 6 Module control restart J Changing module lt Status Guidance 3 ee The module can be exchanged 2 Please press the Execute button after installing a new module nO no Zz O z o L A D 4 Operation check T a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control resumption Z ag Online module change a z 5 Operation Target module a T X Module change execution 1 0 address 000H in 9 hr 3 i Module name Q684D G nom Installation confirmation Status Module control restart 7 7 y Change module installation completion w O Status Guidance oO T SE foj The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions x 2 and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute 5 oO ESQ 2Sa oO Z b Click the OK button to leave the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer S x The online module change mode is stopped A Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again w 5 a ie Ww z z e W 0 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 2 8 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made wit
74. nom END F we S 33 ne a Zz EG Eo ayn Epo 2O e oO z lt x a 0 e aw a W m S WO zZ oz CS a OO 0 Z O O E N W a O pe ke 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 20 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING M ELSEG Q series 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 1 System configuration CH1 external device CH2 external device CH3 external device QY10 Y20 toY 2F QX10 X10 to X1F Q66AD DG X Y0 to X YF 2 Conditions for the intelligent function module switch setting Input range setting Normal resolution mode High resolution mode CH1 4 to 20mA CH2 For2 wire transmitter High resolution mode cH3 input CH4 to not used CH6 3 Program conditions a The following averaging processing specification is used for each channel e CH1 Sampling processing CH2 Time averaging 50 times e CH3 Primary delay filtering 100ms b CH1 uses the input signal error detection function Refer to Section 3 2 3 Input signal error detection 10 c CH2 uses the warning output setting process alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 1 e Process alarm lower lower limit value 1000 e Process alarm lower upper limit value 1500 e Process alarm upper lower limit value 6000 e Process alarm upper upper limit value 7000 d CH3 uses the warning output setti
75. of CH O industrial shipment settings offset gain values CH O user range settings offset gain values x O E lt Som i lt 0 n Ww Zz O oO x lt 2 a q b Compare the values with those in the range reference table and record them if they are correct Refer to Section 7 4 for the range reference table z 3 User range restoration z o a Set the recorded values in the Setting value fields of CH industrial shipment settings offset gain values user range settings offset gain values b Select all the Setting value fields of CH O industrial shipment settings offset gain T values user range settings offset gain values and click the Execute test button a When write is completed the set values are displayed in the Current value fields w D lt z of CH O industrial shipment settings offset gain values CH O user range ra settings offset gain values c Change the Setting value field of pass data write request to Request and click S the Execute test button 8 Make sure that the indication in the Current value field of pass data write request 1 changes from Request to OFF on completion of write 5 ae a 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 27 5 6 5 Pass data Q66AD DG 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEG Q series 5 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh Setting Purpose FB is generated automatically from the intelligent function module parameter in
76. online to display the Online module change screen System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module MasterPLC gt Main base Powe rsu pply Q25PHCPU Unmol unti ng Unmol unti ng Unmo unti ng Parameter status 10 20 30 EArt Address 0 1 2 3 Powe rsu Q25PHCPU pply Intelli gent 16pt None 16pt None 16pt None 16pt Status Module system error Module change og Module error Mode System monitor Online module change Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Detailed inf of power supply Close 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program T 10 SYSTEM SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD w 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 7 11 MELSEC TE eries b Click the Execution button to enable a module change Online module change Operation m Target module 1 0 address O00H Module name Q684D G Module change execution Installation confir
77. oz CS a OO 0 zZ H O O E in z O 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 25 5 6 4 Pass data Q68AD G 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series 3 User range restoration a Set Voltage specified or Current specified in the Setting value field of Pass data classification setting and click the Execute test button When the setting is completed the set data is displayed in the Current value field of CH O Pass data classification setting b lt Set the recorded values in the Setting value fields of CH 1 Industrial shipment settings offset gain values user range settings offset gain values c Select all the Setting value fields of CH O Industrial shipment settings offset gain values user range settings offset gain values and click the Execute test but ton When write is completed the set values are displayed in the Current value fields of CH O Industrial shipment settings offset gain values CH O User range set tings offset gain values d lt Change the Setting value field of Pass data write request to Request and click the Execute test button Make sure that the indication in the Current value field of Pass data write request changes from Request to OFF on completion of write 5 26 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 4 Pass data Q68AD G 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries
78. responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could hav
79. screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause damage to the module In the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change is used and on the MELSECNETI H remote I O stations modules can be replaced online during energizing However there are some restrictions on replaceable modules and the replacement procedures are predetermined for each module For details refer to the chapter of the online module change in this manual Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module Wiring Precautions CAUTION Always ground the FG terminal Not doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction When turning on the power and operating the module after wiring is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attached Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may result in short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in short circuits or malfunction Be ca
80. the buffer memory addresses 22 23 If channels are set at Un G22 and Un G23 at the same time an error will occur and the ERR LED will be lit 3 After the offset gain settings are completed verify that the offset and gain values have been set correctly under actual usage conditions 4 The offset and gain values are stored into the Flash memory and are not erased at power off 5 At the time of offset gain setting turn ON the user range write request YA to write the values to the flash memory Data can be written to the flash memory the maximum of 50 thousand times To prevent accidental writing to the flash memory an error error code 162 will occur if data is written 26 times consecutively 6 If an error error code 40 oO occurs during offset gain setting re set the correct offset gain value The offset gain value of the channel where the error has occurred is not written to the module 1 O indicates the corresponding channel number 7 Module ready X0 turns from OFF to ON when the offset gain setting mode switches to the normal mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN or the setting of the mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Note that initial setting processing will be executed if there is a sequence program that makes initial setting when module ready X0 turns ON 8 Un G200 Un G202 to Un G233 are the areas used to restore the User set offset gain values when online module change is made Refe
81. the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write a condition of the following I O signals Z Z Buffer memory writing condition 65 hee i T W i 5 an on I R L MOV FK aK wit Coe aes o setting setting zZ request completed 5 EOE eg tat O 3 Areas used to restore the User range settings offset gain values when the module is replaced 5 online a Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change a ad 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 53 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 2 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO 1 Set whether to ebable or disable A D conversion for each channel For the Q66AD DG the A D conversion enable disable setting also acts as the ON OFF setting of the power supply to the 2 wire transmitter Note that power is supplied to only the 2 wire transmitters whose channels use input ranges of 4 to 20mA 2 wire transmitter input OH 4 to 20mA Extended mode 2 wire transmitter input AH or User range setting 2 wire transmitter input FH No power is supplied when any other input range is used 2 It is necessary to set the operating condition setting request Y9 to ON OFF in order to validate the A D conversion enable disable setting Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 The Q68AD G is preset to enable A D conversion on all channels 4 The Q66AD DG is preset to disable A D conversion on all channels b15 b14 b1
82. times 2 1H 1 0 Rw a Moving average Time constant settings A CH2 Average time Average number of times p E 2H 2 f l 0 Rw lt Moving average Time constant settings e CH3 Average time Average number of times r 8 3H 3 0 RIW a Moving average Time constant settings oO CH4 Average time Average number of times P 4H 4 i f 0 RIW 2 Moving average Time constant settings Section 3 4 3 CH5 Average time Average number of times i 5H 5 f f i 0 Rw lt Moving average Time constant settings 2 g CH6 Average time Average number of times P qx S 6H 6 0 Rw nu Moving average Time constant settings a Wo CH7 Average time Average number of times Pon 7H 7 0 RIW 2 Oo m Moving average Time constant settings CH8 Average time Average number of times x 8H 8 f i 0 RIW 2 A Moving average Time constant settings a 9H 9 System area Ok Au 10 A D conversion completed flag 0 R Section 3 4 4 2 BH 11 CH1 Digital output value 0 R m Cu 12 CH2 Digital output value 0 R 2 Du 13 CH3 Digital output value 0 R E 59 Ex 14 CH4 Digital output value 0 R n Section 3 4 5 Fu 15 CH5 Digital output value 0 R 10H 16 CH6 Digital output value 0 R 11H 17 CH7 Digital output value 0 R Z 12H 18 CH8 Digital output value 0 R 13H 19 Error code 0 R Section 3 4 6 amp 14H 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 0 R fe Section 3 4 7 m 15H 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 0 R amp 16H 22 Offset gain setting mode offset specification 0 R W f
83. 0 M240 M241 t 2P REMTO J1 K1 K1 H2 K130 D1130 K2 M250 1250 M251 Je REMTO a K1 K1 H2 K142 D1142 K1 M260 x129 Y129 M260 M261 Y129 x129 J rst Y129 MELSEC TE eries A D conversion enable disable setting CH2 Average time Average number of times Move average __ Time constant settings CH3 Average time __ Average number of times Move average __ Time constant settings Averaging process specification Input signal error detection settings Warning output settings CH2 process alarm lower lower limit value CH2 process alarm lower upper limit value CH2 process alarm upper lower limit value CH2 process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 rate alarm warning detection period CH3 rate alarm upper limit value CH3 rate alarm lower limit value CH1 input signal error detection setting value a gt Write to buffer memory a Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 Turns OFF operation condition setting request Y9 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries Digital output value read processing ie a a 12 Concurrently reads the A D 1 H 1f 1 r g 2o gt conversion completed flag and aii au Brace CH1 to CH3 digital output values S 1 H t ov on D J Read the CH1 digital output value f D10 1 O maalit Di De J Read the CH2 digital output value D10 2 rov D
84. 0 CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 83H 131 CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 84H 132 CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 85 133 CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 2 A R W Section 3 4 21 86H 134 CH5 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 2 87H 135 CH5 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 88H 136 CH6 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 89H 137 CH6 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 8AH 138 CH7 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 2 8Bu 139 CH7 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 2 8CH 140 CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 8Du 141 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 CH1 Input signal error detection setting value CH1 Input F 8Ex 142 baie 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH2 Input signal error detection setting value CH2 Input 8FH 143 i i S 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH3 Input signal error detection setting value CH3 Input F 90H 144 i eg 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value i Section 3 4 22 CH4 Input signal error detection setting value CH4 Input 91H 145 i l eine 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH5 Input signal error detection setting value CH5 Input P 92H 146 Pea 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH6 Input signal error detection setting value CH6 Input 93H 147 i f ee ee 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value 1 Indicates whether reading from and w
85. 0 R W 2 CDH 205 CH2 Factory default gain value 0 R W S Ww CE 206 CH3 Factory default offset value 0 R W G CFH 207 CH3 Factory default gain value 0 R W 5 Section 3 4 25 DOH 208 CH4 Factory default offset value 0 R W D1H 209 CH4 Factory default gain value 0 R W Z D24 210 CH5 Factory default offset value 0 R W k z D3H 211 CH5 Factory default gain value 0 R W 9 Y a D4H 212 CH6 Factory default offset value 0 R W k T a 590 D5H 213 CH6 Factory default gain value 3 0 R W meh am D6 214 N to to System area D9H 217 7 to DAH 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 0 R W S 2 DBu 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 0 R W g g a DCH 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 0 R W 6 DDH 221 j i 3 0 Exe CH2 User range settings gain value R W E69 DEH 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 0 R W DFu 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 0 R W z Section 3 4 25 E0u 224 CH4 User range settings offset value 0 R W E1 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 0 R W z E2u 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 0 R W E3 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 0 R W 3 E44 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 0 R W ESH 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 0 R W 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled U R Read enabled 5 W Write enabled Q 2 When writing data to
86. 1 Before creating a program 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le ceries 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Based on the setting conditions given in Section 6 2 2 make the intelligent function module switch settings a Each switch setting 1 Switch1 Switch2 Input range setting lt Switch 2 gt lt Switch 1 gt o Jo Jo fo 4 fo fo jo jo 4 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 1 CH1 to CH3 OH 4 to 20mA input CH4 to CH6 OH default Fixed at 0 2 Switch3 Empty No setting required 3 Switch4 Mode setting lt Switch 4 gt o F o fo 4 El Fixed at 0 Setting of normal resolution mode high resolution mode All channels FH High resolution mode Setting of normal mode Offset gain setting mode All channels 0H normal mode 4 Switch5 Use prohibited 0 fixed lt Switch 5 gt 0 oflo lo yy Fixed at OH 41 If any other than OH is set to Switch 5 an error occurs b Write the settings in a to the Q66AD DG On GX Developer s Parameter setting screen select the I O assignment tab click Switch setting and make settings of Switch 1 to 5 on the screen shown below Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX stot Type Model name Switch 1 Switch 2f Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 H PLC aa S S Rares Ge es ere A
87. 13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag X0 Module ready x9 Operating condition setting completed flag XC Input signal error detection signal XE A D conversion completed flag Q66AD DG X Y0 to X YF XF Error flag Y9 Operating condition setting request YF Error clear request X10 Digital output value read command input signal X11 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X10 to X1F X12 Error reset signal Y20 to Y2B Error code display BCD 3 digits QY10 Y20 to Y2F 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 4 3 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING M ELS eG cries 2 Programming example Initial settings x0 Turns ON Module gt Isr M10 i Leer 1o00 J ready check flag m M100 x9 Y9 v0 3 4 vov H38 Go J A D conversion enable disable setting e vo CH2 Average time s K50 G2 J Average number of times Move average Time constant settings ian goy CH3 Average time z xov ed 33 J Average number of times Move average O aa Time constant settings mov H420 G24 J Averaging process specification uU0 e 3 2 A O Mov H3E G47 J Input signal error detection settings m L vo 2 6 2 A gt ov H3B3D G48 J Warning o
88. 13 D3 y Read the CH3 digital output value Z hko ie erenrR un K2 K1 H2 K10 D10 K4 M300 oO Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence 5M400 c lie BEme aa K4 K1 H2 x50 D6 K2 M320 Read the warning output flag M320 M321 D6 2 Processing at CH2 process O t hf Processing at warning occurrence alarm upper limit value pa E warning occurrence n6 D6 3 Processing at CH2 process gt O hf Processing at warning occurrence alarm lower limit value n warning occurrence D7 4 _ Processing at CH3 rate ht Processing at warning occurrence alarm upper limit value Bees warning occurrence 1A Processing at warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate 2 z F A LU C alarm lower limit value Zz Input signal error detection Status and processing at error detection warning occurrence 5M40 2 REMER wa K5 Kl H2 K49 D8 K1 M330 Y Read the input signal T error detection flag O M330 M331 D8 0 M A ht Processing at error detection I ve a aN input 5 signal error detection wi X22 X12C i i ser Y12F 7 Turn ON the error clear Bs Error code display and reset processing request YF X12F 22 REMPR Aiya K6 K1 H2 K19 D9 K1 M340 Y Read the error code Zz M340 M341 Oo t eco D9 x3v30 Output the error code in BCD E Ny aa ser v z J Tum ON the error clear ig k request YF 9 z 5 a ya z ja fas yiae Turn OFF the error clear a A fiz request YF 5 3 O E re McR NO 7 wo Ww MCR
89. 2 u0 pS ov K100 G3 u0 Mov H420 G24 u0 fi OFE MOV HOFE G47 u0 pe ov HOFBED G48 u0 Mov k1000 G90 u0 Mov K1500 c91 2 u0 MOV K6000 G92 Uo MOV K7000 G93 UoN Mov K50 G120 2 uo MOV K3 G130 D UO MOV K1 G131 E uo MOV K100 G142 SET ws RST M100 x0 Y9 x9 Rst Y9 Read digital output values x10 x0 X0E Y9 vo J L J p A mov G10 K2M0 MO u0 MOV G11 D1 M1 vo MOV G12 D2 M2 uo MOV G13 D3 Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence sM400 u0 mov G50 K4M10 e u0 MOV G51 K4M30 M12 ft Processing at warning occurrence M13 l ft Processing at warning occurrence M34 J ft Processing at warning occurrence M35 tt Processing at warning occurrence j 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 2 3 Programming example without using the utility package MELSEC TE eries Turns ON Module ready check flag A D conversion enable disable setting CH2 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings CH3 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Averaging process specification Input signal error detection settings Warning output settings CH2 process alarm lower lower limit value CH2 process alarm lower upper limit value CH2 process alarm upper lower limit value CH2 process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 rate alarm warning detection
90. 2 value value value value value value value value value value value value value value ot ea a agra rate For Q66AD DG information of b12 to b15 is fixed at 0 0 Normal E m 2 1 Alarm ON 299 W W oom b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b2 bi b0 CH2 CH1 CH1 Un G51 Rate alarm Upper Lower Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper we lt value value value value value value value value value value value 5 0 ey 1T For Q66AD DG information of b12 to b15 is fixed at 0 0 Normal z6 1 Alarm ON IZ 582 3 4 15 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 F P 0 1 Whether to enable or disable the scaling function for each channel is set in this area z 2 To validate the scaling function the operating condition setting request Y9 must be g turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 g oa 3 All channels are defaulted to Disable b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO w Q S WO 0 Active Be For Q68AD G information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 1 Inactive 65 For Q66AD DG information of b6 to b15 is fixed at 0 i i Point A H Ni Q When the Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 is set to Disable Os are Q a stored in the CHO scaling value storage area Un G54 to Un G61 v4 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 65 3 4 14 Warning output flag Un G50 Un 51 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ri
91. 3 Enable the input signal error detection of the corresponding channel 9 4 Turn ON the operating condition setting request Y9 z o O a oa z gt a S oz CS a OO 0 Z O O a N a O ra 3 2 Function List 3 19 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 20 MELSEC TA cries 7 How to set an input signal error detection upper lower limit values Set input signal error detection upper lower limit values based on the input signal error detection setting value input signal error detection upper lower limit setting values Set the values in the unit of 1 0 1 The input signal error detection setting value is reflected to both the input signal error detection upper and lower limit values by default To detect input signal errors using only an upper limit value or lower limit value or to individually set an upper limit value and a lower limit value refer to 9 in this section a Input signal error detection upper limit value This value is calculated as follows Gain value Full input range Gain value Offset value x Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection upper limit setting value A value equal to or greater than the gain value can be set A setting value can be calculated by the following formula Input signal error detection Input signal error detection ee en eee setting value i upper limit value ain value of each range Input s
92. 3 4 4 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 5 CHO digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 1 Digital values converted from analog values are stored for respective channels gt W gt 2 Digital values are stored in 16 bit signed binary format 2 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G11 to Un G18 ke 7 gt Bit data section 2 3 WE nz O Sign bit es 1 Negative 0 Positive 3 While the operating condition setting request Y9 is ON 0 is stored in this area 4 Use the A D conversion competed flag XE or the A D conversion completed flag Un G10 as an interlock to read out the digital output value o Z Q lt 9 O W a 7 BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 57 3 4 5 CH digital output value Un G11 to Un G718 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 6 Write data error code Un G19 1 An error code generated by the A D converter module is stored here 2 Refer to Section 8 1 for details of the error codes 3 4 7 Setting range Un G20 Un G21 1 These areas are used to confirm the input ranges of respective channels A value set in the input range setting is stored in the corresponding channel area as shown below
93. 3 X12F Output the error 290 A H Bcd w9 K3Y30 FOL code in BCD a amp a SET Y12F J Turn ON the error clear request Y12F YI2F X120 X12F k H RST Y12F J Turn OFF the error clear request Y12F 9 Sa S Jn 7 9 3 awk gt Z O I2 Point 568 To write the intelligent function module parameters set the target remote I O e station from Online Transfer setup on GX Developer They can be written by g e Directly connecting GX Developer to the remote I O station A q e Connecting GX Developer to another device such as a CPU module and 7 passing through the network g w E a S WO zZ oz ZT OO 0 Z O O T 7p w a O ra e 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 16 6 3 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 17 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility package MELSEC TE eries x Point The dedicated instructions used for reading writing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module on a remote I O station REMTO and REMFR are the execution type for which several scans are needed Therefore transmissions of the execution results are not synchronized with the I O signal operations When reading a digital output value on an A D converter module after changing the operating condition during operation be sure to read the A D conversion completed flag buffer memory address 10 at the same time Also for the case of
94. 3 b12 b11 b10 b9 For Q68AD G information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 Q68AD G A D conversion enable For Q66AD DG information of b6 to b15 is fixed at 0 1 A D conversion disable 3 0 A D conversion enable power supply ON Seeneeae di A D conversion disable power supply OFF Setting example of Q68AD G When channels for A D conversion are 1 and 3 OOFAH is stored into the Un GO b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO o o o o ofo o o JE 1 1 1 0 1 0 ooFA CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 0 F A Setting example of QE6AD DG When channels for A D conversion are 2 and 4 0035H is stored into the Un GO b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0035x CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 3 54 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 2 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 4 3 CHOI average time average number of times moving average time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 1 Set the average time average count moving average count or primary delay filter z time constant for each channel for which averaging processing is specified 2 To validate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned a ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 e 3 0 is set as the default ii 4 The setting ranges are as follows Processing method Setting value
95. 5V Current 30mA S a W a fe ra 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 3 1 1 Performance specifications list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries Table3 1 Performance Specifications of Q68AD G Item Specifications Isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Specific isolated area Isolation method Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC rms 1min 500VDC 10MQ or more Transformer isolation Between analog input 1000VAC rms 1min channels Maximum number of writes to flash memory Up to 50 000 times Number of I O occupied points 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points External wiring connection system 40 pin connector Applicable wire size External device connection connector Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 3mm AWG22 or less for AGCON1 A6CON4 0 088mm to 0 24mm AWG28 to 24 for AGCON2 A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON4 sold separately 0 46A Weight 0 16kg 1 Accuracy of offset gain setting at ambient temperature 2 digit indicates a digital value 3 Accuracy per temperature change of 1 C Example Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30 C 0 1 reference accuracy 0 00714 C temperature coefficient x 5 C temperature change difference 0 1357 4 The cycle in which A D conversion values are updated 5 The time required for an input signal
96. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEC Ke cries Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual Q68AD G Q66AD DG GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions NCAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precaution N WARNING Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not use any prohibited to use signals as an output signal to an intelligent functi
97. A a w E gt a S WO zZ oz ZT OO 0 Z O O T 7p w a O ra 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 15 4 6 1 Offset gain settings Q68AD G 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries b When switching the mode using the setting of the mode switching setting Switches to offset gain setting mode uo it Hoy H4144 0158 uo f HOY H964 159 SET Y9 ya X9 E a RST Yg Common program Switches to normal mode WS N uo 4 way H964 158 E uo way H4144 159 SET Ya ya xg 4E TRST 9 92 Processing in normal mode 96 TEND Un G158 Un G159 and operation condition setting request Y9 Sets 4144H to buffer memory address 158 Sets 964H to buffer memory address 159 Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 Turns OFF operation condition setting request Y9 Sets 964H to buffer memory address 158 Sets 4144H to buffer memory address 159 J Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 Turns OFF operation condition setting request Y9 c When switching the mode by making intelligent function module switch setting 4 16 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 6 1 Offset gain settings Q68AD G Only the common program is necessary 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC KE eries
98. A generic term for the following Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System oe Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Poot viete Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System A generic term for the following Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System A generic term for the following Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Windows 7 l RA S l l Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Note that the 32 bit version is designated as 32 bit Windows 7 and the 64 bit version is desig nated as 64 bit Windows 7 PACKING LIST The product package contains the following Model Product Quantity Q68AD G Type Q68AD G Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module 1 A 12 Model Q66AD DG Product Type Q66AD DG Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module with Signal Conditioning Function Quantity 1 FG terminal L Shaped metal fitting SW2D5C QADU E GX Configurator AD Version 2 1 license product CD ROM SW2D5C QADU EA GX Configurator AD Version 2 Multiple license pr
99. AGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe re
100. C ete 5 12 File menu Moves the setting of the selected line to the lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab Intelligent function module parameters of the project opened by GX Developer are handled Open parameters Close parameters Save parameters Delete parameters Open FB support parameters Save as FB support parame ters Exit Online menu Monitor Test Read from PLC Write to PLC 5 3 Utility Package Operation Reads a parameter file Closes the parameter file If any data are modi fied a dialog asking for file saving will appear Saves the parameter file Deletes the parameter file Opens the FB support parameter file Saves the FB support parameter file Close this screen Activates the Select monitor test module screen Reads intelligent function module parameters from the CPU module Writes intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module 5 3 3 Starting the intelligent function module utility 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries Point 1 Saving intelligent function module parameters in a file a Since intelligent function module parameters cannot be saved in a file by the i project saving operation of GX Developer save them on the shown module 2 selection screen 2 Reading writing intelligent function module parameters from to a programma 3 ble controller CPU using GX Developer 2 a Intelligent
101. C GPPw AD E E K BN Window Hep Inteligent function module parameter Online Tools Help ools I r eta Tools Intelligent function utility Select a target inteligent function module 4 tan oe aes size gt Start pose scene Zz T S P senes 0000 A D Conversion Module O U Merge data Check parameter gt poche nodal ae z 4 Transfer ROM QB8AD G we Delete unused comments 20 Parameter setting module me Clear all parameters HL IC memory card gt TERE FB Support Parameter oO Z Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh lt A O 4 Start ladder logic test O000 6840 6 4 Set TEL data gt Intelligent Function utility Utility list Ch i T ange display color ARRS O Options _FBpaeneteo gt lt q Create start up setting file Initial setting Auto refresh Delete 6 LL Oo Refer to Section 5 5 3 m N gt 1 TENEI l Initial setting screen Auto refresh setting screen Initial setting Auto refresh setting W g Module infomation TER ara Module type A D Conversion Module Stat ONo 0000 Module information 250 Module model name QS8AD G Module type A D Conversion Module StattI O No 0000 tow a Woe Module model name Q68AD G 500 Setting item Setting value EOL CH1 Initial setting CH1 Initial setting wow CH2 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting Module side Module side Transfer PLC side S pea Transfer Device word count Setting item Buffer size CH3 Initial set
102. Click the Execution button to enable a module change Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address O00H Module change execution oe Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel If the following error screen appears the user range cannot be saved Click the OK button dismount the module as is and perform the operation in Section 2 c and later MELSOFT series GX Developer i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the connector and dismount the module Point Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 7 33 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC KE eries 3 Mounting of new module m a Mount a new module to the same slot and install the connector gt b After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF Z On
103. Click the OK button dismount the module as is and perform the operation in Section 7 3 6 2 c and later MELSOFT series GX Developer 1 The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the connector and dismount the module Point Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 3 Mounting of new module a Mount the dismounted module and new module to the other system b Using the G P OGLOAD instruction save the user set values to the CPU device Refer to Appendix 1 2 for the G P OGLOAD instruction c Using the G P OGSTOR instruction restore the user set values to the module Refer to Appendix 1 3 for the G P OGSTOR instruction d Dismount the new module from the other system mount it to the slot from where the old module was dismounted in the original system and install the connector 7 27 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC KE eries e After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF z W Online module change a Operation Target
104. Digital output value CH1 Maximum value CH1 Minimum value CH2 Maximum value Make text file End setup Cancel c Writing the intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 5 3 3 Write the intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module This operation is performed using the parameter setting module selection screen 6 25 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 4 2 Programming example using the utility package PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 3 Programming example Read digital output values A xO XDE Ya ug gt r Read the A D conversion z J J J I i Us af i HOW a KZN completed flag f gt HO E e e MOY D11 Read the CH1 digital output value H P HOY 2 D12 J Read the CH2 digital output value Z M2 a O rpo 2 D13 Read the CH3 digital 5 output value g Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence 5 A O rpo 6 kanig 7 Read the warning Wit E output flag Process alarm 5 Z gt r Read the warning n LHO M output flag Rate alarm M12 rpi iaa R Processing at CH2 process alarm rocessing at waming occumencej upper limit value warning occurrence M13 rp 2 Processing at CH2 process alarm Ea Processing at waming occurence lower limit value warning occurrence O
105. ECPU QO4UDEHCPU Up to 64 QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCP U Safety CPU QS001CPU N A x x QO6CCPU V C Controller module QO6CCPU V B Up to 64 Oo Oo Q12DCCPU V High Performance model QCPU Up to 24 Universal model QCPU Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 3 An extension base unit cannot be connected to a safety CPU eeeeeeeeaeseeoeeeeeoeeeoeoeeeesoeeeeeeeoeoeoeseeeeoeeoeoeeeea ee eee To use the A D converter module with a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module eeeeeeeseesceeoeoeeoeseeeeeoeoeeoeoeeeaes eee eoeeeeeeoeoeoeeeeeeeeaeae eee 2 2 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC KE eries b Mounting to a MELSECNET H remote I O station The table below shows the network modules and base units applicable to the A D converter module and quantities for each network module model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules OVERVIEW 2 Applicable
106. Explanation of items 1 Setting contents it Set A D conversion enable disable averaging process specification and others for ce each channel 35 2 Command buttons 2 Make text file Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format r o End setup Saves the set data and ends the operation Bo O O Cancel Cancels the setting and ends the operation 2 2 O H H Point 3 E 1 Change the RUN STOP switch of the CPU module STOP RUN STOP g Q RUN o 2 After setting the RUN STOP switch to RUN power the programmable control Zz ler OFF ON or reset the CPU module 2 When using a sequence program to write initial setting data the data will be writ o5 ten when the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN Create a program so 239 x agi Fi a Wo that initial setting is re executed in the sequence program pop oom ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 4 Initial Setting 5 415 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series 5 5 Auto Refresh Setting Purpose Configure the A D converter module s buffer memory for auto refresh Operating procedure Start I O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal Setting screen Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No
107. FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the specified device S Start number of the device in which control data is stored Device name Device that is turned ON 1 scan on completion of dedicated D instruction processing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion Within the range of the speci fied device Bit Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 4 Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD x a z m a a lt INDEX APPENDIX Control data of Q68AD G MELSEC TE eries Device Item Set data Setting range Set by S System area Stores the status when the instruction is S 1 Completion status complete System 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion Specify the voltage current of the offset gain values to be read 0 Voltage specified S 2 Pass data classification setting 1 Current specigd 0000H to OOFF H User b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 CH8 CH7 cnd CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 S 3 System area S 4 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 5 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 6 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 7 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 8 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset
108. Fixed 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 3 Program conditions a The following averaging processing specification is used for each channel gt e CH1 Sampling processing z CH2 Time averaging 50 times e CH3 Primary delay filtering 100ms Zz b CH1 uses the input signal error detection function Refer to Section 3 2 3 2 e Input signal error detection 10 O c CH2 uses the warning output setting process alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 1 ae e Process alarm lower lower limit value 1000 e Process alarm lower upper limit value 1500 e Process alarm upper lower limit value 6000 ee i e Process alarm upper upper limit value 7000 5 d CH3 uses the warning output setting rate alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 2 S e Rate alarm warning detection period 50ms 3 e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 3 D e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 1 Zz e In case of a write error an error code is indicated in BCD format The error code is reset after the error cause is resolved a 250 tow a Wg 4 List of devices BSR W W nom Device Function D1 W1 CH1 Digital output value a D2 W2 CH2 Digital output value a E D3 W3 CH3 Digital output value g 2 D6 D7 W6 W7 Warning output flag a gt D8 ws Input signal error detection flag S o D9 W9 1 Error code aes D10 A D conversion com
109. For details refer to Section 5 7 E O O E in 2 O 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 11 5 3 3 Starting the intelligent function module utility Point UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TA cries The lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab is displayed when the project which is being edited is a label project 2 Command buttons Common operations to the lt lt Intelligent function module parameter gt gt tab and lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab Delete Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting of the selected module However if initial setting and auto refresh setting have been prepared and the cell of initial setting or auto refresh setting is selected and executed only the setting of the selected cell is deleted Exit Close this screen When the lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab is selected lt lt Parameter Moves the setting of the selected line to the lt lt Intelligent function module parameter gt gt tab When the lt lt Intelligent Function Module Parameter gt gt tab is selected FB Parameter gt gt 3 Menu bar a Intelligent function module utility D el Sees Online To Open parameters Cro f Close parameters Save parameters Crs f Delete parameters br Exit b le utility C MELSEC GPR oy elite Tools Help Monitor Test y Read from PLC odi write to PL
110. H Single CP t oe Deps S System Cannot be used Cannot be used Version 1 13H or later Q100UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system If installed ina MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later Version 2 09K or later Cannot be used Point Depending on the version of GX Configurator AD applicable system CPU module and functions of A D converter module Refer to Appendix 2 for details 2 4 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 2 2 Precautions on System Configuration 1 When using the A D converter module with Redundant CPU OVERVIEW a Dedicated instruction The dedicated instruction cannnot be used b GX Configurator AD connection GX Configurator AD cannot be used when accessing Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module on an extension base unit from GX Developer Connect a personal computer with a communication path indicated below z Q lt E gt 9 ra e oO SYSTEM Main base unit SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES Direct connection to use the CPU Connection through an intelligent function module on the main base unit Through Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 2 2 Pr
111. MN G158 UM G159 oe eect ee eeeente eee eeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 3 73 3 4 24 Save data classification setting Un G200 Q68AD G only cece eeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenas 3 73 3 4 25 Factory default and User range settings offset gain value Un G202 to Un G233 3 74 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 1to4 22 44 cHandling Precautions aonni a a a Sewia eels dena ages E eee EEEE eee 4 1 4 1 1 Attaching a module fixing bracket Q66AD DG only ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaaas 4 2 42 Setup and Procedures before Operation cccccceeeeeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeseesieaeees 4 3 4 3 Part NAMES enaa epee ientecchicaatcgevoeecitedea tanteceti vai E Goa as ev ae ees 4 4 AA MV ATETA ESE EEEE EEEE eat atl ions stad E EE ee thd cd eer tal gatas tute 4 7 4 4 1 Winnog PreCaUtlOnSi s eciicei c easton eaa EEE she aobetate AE A A AANE 4 7 4 4 2 External Ning aa A A A ie eet ae E 4 8 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 0 cece ee ners eee eieee eee taeeeeeetaeeeeeetaeeeeeeeea 4 10 4 6 Offset Gain Settings ie zis a4 eens chat pe E AAA A pawn ate ated nth cane ee ed ee ae 4 12 4 6 1 Offset gain settings QG8AD G Y sieis irsk rant kr ker Ean nE teeee eee teeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesenaaeeeeeeeaaaees 4 13 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG o oo eeeeceeeeee En Ear eee teneeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeeesenaaees 4 17 4 6 3 A D conversion value storage durin
112. O wW a N Zz ici PER O entered the digital output value will be fixed at the maximum or minimum 5 N value ora ae Digital output value Digital output value Analog input 3 F d 2 9 is 5 3 5 4 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode FOL range setting al Ae 0 to 20mA 96 4095 288 12287 4 to 20mA f0 4 to 20mA ok 1096 4595 3288 13787 Extended mode 3 User range setting 96 4095 288 12287 x i E8 EX D24 o zZ lt L id fe A W E gt a S LW z9 i zapa OO zZ fe E N W a fe ad 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 11 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 1 3 Accuracy The reference accuracy is the accuracy at the ambient temperature for offset gain setting The temperature coefficient is the accuracy per temperature variation of 1 C The reference accuracy is the accuracy relative to the maximum digital output value Even if you change the offset gain setting or input range to change the input characteristic the reference accuracy and temperature coefficient do not change and are kept within the ranges given in the performance specifications Example Accuracy when the temperature changed from 25 C to 30 C 0 1 reference accuracy 0 00714 C temperature coefficient 5 C temperature variation difference 0 1357 3 12 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 3 Accuracy
113. Procedure 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is available g 1 Conversion disable 4 O a Set the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channel conversion disable and turn operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON to stop conversion After confirming that conversion has stopped with the A D conversion completion z flag Un G10 turn off Operation Condition Setting Request Y9 Z0 e Device test Bit device Device vs zi FORCEON FORCEOFF Toggle force tide histo z Word device buffer memory S LL C Device 7 g Buffer memory Module start O 0000 Hex D Address fo DEC gt Setting value Zz FF HEX 16 bitinteger gt Set 2 Program N Label reference program MAN o a A fm 2509 Execution history tow a Wg Device Setting condition 5300 9 Force ON Bes Module start 0 Address 0 D FF H nom Force OFF we i The screen shows the setting example of the Q68AD G 20 a 2 Dismounting of module 569 a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode double click the module to be changed online to display the Online module change screen Z System Monitor z Instal
114. Q66AD DG TT RUN ALM ENE E T E l SI 102 4 02 A M3 screw Accessory 89 3 50 gt 97 5 3 84 130 5 12 47 1 85 23 0 91 177 6 97 27 4 gt 1 08 i terminal Accessory M3 screw Accessory Unit mm inch App 15 Appendix 3 External Dimensions INDEX Number 2 wire transmitter cecccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 1 1 A A D conversion completed flag 8 3 39 3 56 A D conversion enable disable setting 3 13 3 54 A D conversion methods c ccceeeeeeeeteees 3 13 A D conversion starting time setting 3 66 A D conversion starting time setting function 3 29 A D conversion value storage during offset gain SOUIUNG A I E E A A peeteaac 4 22 A D converter MOdUIE ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees A 12 Absolute maximum input 2 eceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeee 3 1 ACCUPACY cenieni iaae a i ai nieee 3 1 3 2 3 12 ALM LE Doae a A A A ERAEN 4 5 Analog Mputa rataa er aaen 3 1 3 3 Applicable module c ecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseees 2 1 Applicable wire size e cecseeeeeeeeeeteees 3 2 3 3 Auto refresh Setting cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaees 5 16 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settingS c eee 3 55 Averaging process specification
115. Q66AD DG X Y120 to X Y12F fe QY10 X Y110 to X Y11F T QX10 X Y100 to X Y10F T QJ72LP25 O Q N 2 Conditions for the intelligent function module switch setting a O Input range setting Normal resolution mode High resolution mode CH1 4 to 20mA o ce CH2 For 2 wire transmitter High resolution mode z 50 CH3 input 2 x to not used Based on the setting conditions given in the above make the intelligent function mod we ule switch settings 6 Select the I O assignment tab on the Intelligent function module switch settings as O screen and click Switch setting to set the following values aon EA Switch No Setting value 224 Switch 1 0000H CH1 to CH3 4 to 20mA For 2 wire transmitter input e Switch 2 0000H CH4 to CH6 Default Switch 3 o Switch 4 OFOOH High resolution mode Switch 5 0000H OH Fixed 3 Program conditions a The following averaging processing specification is used for each channel e CH1 Sampling processing m CH2 Time averaging 50 times a e CH3 Primary delay filtering 100ms ripe ZZ b CH1 uses the input signal error detection function Refer to Section 3 2 3 25 e Input signal error detection 10 0 Z O O E N i a O ra 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 30 6 PROGRAMMING 6 31 MELSEC TA eries c CH2 uses the warning output setting process alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 1 e Process alarm lowe
116. Q68AD G information of b8 to b15 is fixed at 0 0 Normal For Q66AD DG information of b6 to b15 is fixed at 0 1 Input signal error 3 64 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 13 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 14 Warning output flag Un G50 Un 51 ae 1 If the digital output value or its varying rate falls outside the setting range set to the CHO process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 or CHO rate alarm i upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 the warning output flag for the corresponding channel turns to 1 2 For both the process alarm and rate alarm whether the warning is for the upper or a lower limit value can be checked on a channel basis z 3 When the digital output value or its varying rate returns to within the setting range the m g warning output flag is automatically reset ae 4 Ifa warning is detected on any one of the channels for which A D conversion and process alarm or rate alarm warning output are enabled the Warning output signal X8 also turns ON 5 When the operating condition setting request Y9 is turned ON the warning output flag is cleared 2 Zz O lt o E S W a N b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Zz Un G50 Process alarm Upper Lower Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper
117. R W 28H 40 CH6 Maximum value 0 R W 29H 41 CH6 Minimum value 0 R W 2A 42 CH7 Maximum value 0 R W 2Bu 43 CH7 Minimum value 0 R W 2CH 44 CH8 Maximum value 0 R W 2DH 45 CH8 Minimum value 0 R W 2Ex 46 System area Input signal error detection extended input signal error i S 2Fu 47 l OOFFH RIW 2 Section 3 4 11 detection setting 30H 48 Warning output setting FFFFu RIW 2 Section 3 4 12 31H 49 Input signal error detection flag 0 R Section 3 4 13 32H 50 Warning output flag Process alarm 0 R p Section 3 4 14 33H 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 0 R 34H 52 System area 35H 53 Scaling enable disable setting OOFFH RIW 2 Section 3 4 15 36H 54 CH1 Scaling value 0 R 37H 55 CH2 Scaling value 0 R 38H 56 CH3 Scaling value 0 R 39H 57 CH4 Saling value 0 R Section 3 4 16 3AH 58 CH5 Scaling value 0 R 3Bu 59 CH6 Scaling value 0 R 3CH 60 CH7 Scaling value 0 R 3D 61 CH8 Scaling value 0 R 3EH 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIw 2 3FH 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 RIW 2 40x 64 CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 Section 3 4 17 41H 65 CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 RIw 2 424 66 CH3 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIw 2 43H 67 CH3 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memor
118. RIW 2 82H 130 CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 RIW 2 83H 131 CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 Section 3 4 21 84H 132 CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Rw 2 85H 133 CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Riw 2 86H 134 CH5 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 2 87H 135 CH5 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIw 2 88H 136 CH6 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Rw 2 89H 137 CH6 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 2 8AH 138 to to System area 8DH 141 CH1 Input signal error detection setting value CH1 Input F 8EH 142 i l CRE 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH2 Input signal error detection setting value CH2 Input Pe 8Fu 143 ee 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH3 Input signal error detection setting value CH3 Input P 90H 144 f l Ea 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value f Section 3 4 22 CH4 Input signal error detection setting value CH4 Input F 91H 145 i nee 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH5 Input signal error detection setting value CH5 Input F 92H 146 f G 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value CH6 Input signal error detection setting value CH6 Input 93H 147 nae 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value 94H 148 System area 95H 149 96H 150 CH1 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 R W 2 97H 151 CH2 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 R W 2 Sec
119. Refer to Section 4 6 z Q lt a W Q fo W a O L m a n W 4 2 tO n Ww Q fe a o Use the utility package g5 go YES a Zo es a ESA Initial setting and auto refresh setting eS The program can be simplified if the utility package is used for setting Refer to Chapter 5 I o zZ Programming and debugging Create and check the sequence program fs fe ia A W E 3 a S LW z9 Ia ZE OO 0 Z E 0 T n W a fe v4 4 2 Setup and Procedures before Operation 4 3 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 3 Part Names MELSEC TE cries The name of each part of the A D converter module is shown below 1 Q68AD G F 3 Q 2 Q66AD DG Module fixing screw 2 eg External device ae Wy connector Terminal Terminal number number A1 B1 A20 B20 L 4 5 Module fixing bracket 3 SI 4 4 4 3 Part Names 2 eS a device pe connector Terminal 5 Terminal number number A1 B1 A20 n B20 O WA T LO J bo aF 5 gt 4 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC KE eries Number Name and appearance Description Displays the operating status of the A D converter mod
120. Refer to Section 5 4 Q e 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 3 2 Operation overview 5 9 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEG Q series 1 ioninei Monitor Test lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab FB conversion screen Selecting monitor test module screen FB conversion screen Select monitor test module X FB conversion r Select monitor test module Start 120 No Module type FB program is generated from the following contents pooo 67D Conversion Module z Module model name Smua Module model Initial e FB program name h i i Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name OO0O O684D G Refer to Section 5 7 Monitor Test screen Monitor Test r Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module modelname Q68AD G Setting item Current value a CH2 Operating condition setting CH3 Operating condition setting Monitoring Stop monitor Refer to Section 5 6 5 10 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 3 2 Operation overview 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC KE eries 5 3 3 Starting the intelligent function module utility ZI Operating procedure Intelligent function module utility is started from GX Developer Tools Intelligent function utili
121. StEM MONItOM 00 eee eeeeee eect eetteeeeeeeetaeeeeeneaaas 8 7 T Temperature coefficient eee 3 1 3 3 3 12 Time AVELAGING eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeeaaees 3 13 TIME consta oaeaeei apaid aen Reini 3 16 Transfer setup cccccceceeceeeeeeteeeeeecneeceeeeeeeetees 5 13 Troubleshooting essre e n a 8 5 U Uninstalling deira diene dedeinneeeteeee 5 2 User range writing request 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 40 Utility package a 5 1 Index 2 V Voltage input characteristic eeeeeeeeeees 3 6 W Warning output flag ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenteeeeeeeees 3 65 Warning output FUNCTION eeeeeeeeetteeeeeee tee 3 25 Warning output settings 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetee 3 63 Warning output signal n se 3 35 WOIGKE TEE A EEE ATE A EE E T 3 2 3 4 Write data error code sseeeeeeeeeeeieesererrrssseee e 3 58 Weto PLG aea Ta RE E 5 12 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held
122. This is used to check the text that cannot be dis played in the current value field However in this utility package all items can be displayed in the dis play fields Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Close the Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format Selects whether or not to monitor current values Performs a test on the selected items To select more than one item select them while holding down Ctrl key Closes the screen that is currently open and returns to the previous screen 3 Example of using Execute test The following is an example to change sampling processing of CH1 to count averag ing processing in 10 times a Click the Operating setting button in the Monitor Test screen b Set CH1 Averaging process specification to Count c Click the setting field of CH1 Average time Average number of times Move aver age Time constant settings d Input 10 as the number of averaging then click the _Enter key At this point CH1 is still set to sampling processing e Select the setting areas b to d holding the Ctrl key Multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse over them also f Click the Execute test button to write the data After the writing is completed the written values are displayed in th
123. Transfer Mtd Device o CH1 Digital output value 1 gt Zz CH2 Digital output value 1 gt 2 FETTERE a This one row is counted as one setting 2 ia ope g CHS Digital output value E Blank rows are not counted 0 CHE Digital output value E Count up all the setting items on this 2 CH7 Digtal output value screen and add the total to the a Eat enea number of settings for other intelligent CH1 Maximum value 4 function modules to get a grand total Make text file Endsetup Cancel L 3 a S wo ZZ Ia ZE OO 0 Z Q S T n W a fe ra 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 5 3 5 2 1 Handling precautions 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE cries 5 2 2 Operating environment This section explains the operating environment of the personal computer that runs GX Configurator AD Item Description Installation Add in target Add in to GX Developer Version 4 English version or later 2 Computer A personal computer with any of the operating systems below CPU Refer to the next page Operating system and performance required for personal computer Required memory Hard disk For installation 65 MB or more space For operation 20 MB or more Display 800 x 600 dots or more resolution Operating system 1s 2 3 A Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System En
124. UDHCPU 130220000000000 B 091013092955015 B 0 0 Intelli Q Q68A4D G 16Point 0000 100620000000000 Cc no 0 1 Empty 5 0 2 Empty 0 3 Empty S i 1 Production number g Production number indication is not available for the A D converter module a is shown Zz O Point 2g P ara The serial No on the rating plate and the front of the module may be different from 220 Ww the serial No displayed on the product information list in GX Developer 596 5 x a The serial No on the rating plate and the front of the module indicates the aa management information of the product e The serial No displayed on the product information list in GX Developer A indicates the function information of the product The function information os of the product is updated when a new function is added 53 awk z6 I 592 oO zZ Fa o O x A W E fa S LW z9 oz CS a OO 0 O O E N W a O ae He 2 3 How to Check the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 2 7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC cries 2 Checking the software version of GX Configurator AD The software version of GX Configurator AD can be checked on GX Developer by clicking Help Product information Product information amp Programming and Maintenance tool p GX Developer Version 8 32 SW8D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Prod
125. W 2 rs 57H 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 58H 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 2 59H 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 o 5AH 90 CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIw 2 2 cP 5Bu 91 CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 ar fo lt a 5Cu 92 CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 a H 4 5DH 25 CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIwW 2 m g m 5EH 94 CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIW 2 5FH 95 CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 60H 96 CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 a S 61H 97 CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 S _ Section 3 4 19 Sa 62H 98 CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 2 lt 2 ERA 7 Z 63H 99 CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 a S 64H 100 CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIW 2 Aa Bla 65H 101 CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 66H 102 CH5 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 2 67H 103 CH5 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 68H 104 CH5 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 RIw 2 9 69H 105 CH5 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 6A 106 CH6 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIW 2 amp 6Bu 107 CH6 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 RIW 2 2 ey o 6Cu 108 CH6 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 6Du 109 CH6 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 2 6Ex 110 m
126. W E 7 fe D9H 217 CH8 Factory default gain value 0 R W 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled U 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write 5 condition of the following I O signals S Buffer memory writing condition L m Y9 x9 zg H ime mov e H 2g Writing Operating Operating i OO request condition condition setting Seang request completed Lessee lag___ oO Z 3 Areas used to restore the User range settings offset gain values when the module is replaced 5 online Q Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change n a fe ra 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 47 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 48 MELSEC TA eries Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 6 6 Address Description Default R w 1 Reference ipti u Hexadecimal Decal i DAH 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 0 R W DBu 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 0 R W DCH 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 0 R W DDH 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 0 R W DEx 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 0 R W DFu 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 0 R W EO 224 CH4 User range settings offset value 0 R W E1 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 0 R W Section 3 4
127. Wea rp iaat A Processing at CH3 rate alarm 3 L rocessing at waming occurence Upper limit value warning occurrence fie W35 rp Processing at CH3 rate alarm T Processing at waming occurrence lower limit value warning occurrence F Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection SW400 p Read the input signal Liov pe Kei50 J error detection flag Z Hoo A Processing at error detection 7 Processing at CH1 input lt z signal error detection g ma a on xog FSET YOF Turn ON the error clear O L d request YF a a a Error code display and reset processing 2 8 9 Al2 XOF 7 Wo W Bco D9 kyo O Suput ne error N A m Turn ON the error clear 7 SET Yor request YF YOF XOG XOF Turn OFF the error w e H F AF RST YOF J clear request YF g z d 33 TEND J Kafra Z Zo Eo ayn 582 e o z lt a 0 fe a a wW E a S WO zZ oz CS a OO 0 Z e O E N wW m O ra Ee 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 26 6 4 2 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 27 MELSEC TE eries 6 4 3 Programming example without using the utility package 1 List of devices Device Function D1 CH1 Digital output value D2 CH2 Digital output value D3 CH3 Digital output value MO to M2 A D conversion completed flag M100 Module ready check flag M12 M
128. a O E 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 21 5 6 2 Offset gain setting operation 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD 5 22 MELSEC TE eries 5 Write settings into module Write the content set up by operations 2 to 4 into module by clicking the Registration button a Precaution While the set data of the steps 2 to 4 are written to the module after clicking the Registration button do not perform the operations below If they are performed the data inside E2PROM will have a problem and the A D converter module may not operate normally e Powering off the programmable controller CPU e Resetting the programmable controller CPU 6 Switch to the normal mode When the offset gain setting screen is closed by clicking the Close button after the setting operation has finished module s operation mode transits to the normal mode EJ Point If an error code is displayed while performing the setting operation the details and measure of the error can be confirmed by clicking the button to the right of the error code display area In addition the error anne can be cleared by clicking the Error clear button 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 2 Offset gain setting operation 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC KE eries 5 6 3 Confirmation of conversion characteristic i Purpose 5 Per a
129. aat it le E EEE E a Re a act i ee caer ikl eed Seer cee E EE Specifies channel where offset gain setting will be made 2 i nO l HOY HI po Stores channel where offset f gain setting will be made into DO Specifies channel where offset setting will be made Ve uji Hoy Do oH Specifies offset setting channel T i Z i F UO Sets 0 to buffer memory 2 L ue address 23 3 Specifies channel where gain setting will be made f u i H1 XOA uo 7 D F 1 f Hoy pO G23 J Specifies gain setting channel h UO Sets 0 to buffer memory i f 1 Lee Ko nae address 22 Changes channel where offset gain setting will be made i 5 ie zon FSE Yoe Turns ON channel change T l L J request YB om i xX0B pA S res 08 Turns OFF channel change i 50 i i lt A u i z request YB i W Registers offset gain setting results to module f fo g f na KOA _ _ Turns ON user range writing i a 1 1 LSE YOA J request YA i XOA 7 _ Turns OFF user range writing f RS YOA request YA Fey rc a a e gage ae a aa aa Rig a i E tg a ia gs fg a i Er Aa aaa E a a reia a ee ae ei Nee aly a E a sam ene fa e Switches to normal mode S s ie Stores setting of dedicated D Le n p instruction G OFFGAN into D1 g 2 Z 2 EG 8 OF FGAN ug DI Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN 5 8 XOA 5 68 J f Processing in normal mode TEND 0 Z 1 The program in the dotted area is a common program oO O
130. ain setting being made 250 operation will be performed with the default values 336 Ww Ww nom 2 Dismounting of module A We 0 a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the 3s Online module change mode double click the module to be changed online to as 3 Q display the Online module change screen E A 582 System Monitor Installed status Base 0 7 2 3 r Base Module MasterPLC gt TES eave A E O Men best oO Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Zz y unti Me ig is Q25PHCPU o O a A Parameter status Mode EArt Address o i 2 3 40 System monitor 1 2 3 4 Online module change Powe Intelli None None None None a rsu Q25PHCPU gent Diagnostics pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Module s Detailed Information Base Information Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs Product Inf List Status i Module system error o Module error o Module warming Detailed inf of power supply Hi Module change Stop monitor iia TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 32 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries b
131. alled status Base 1 2 3 4 Base Module MasterPLC gt 5 Main base Powe Unmoj Unmo Unmo Unmo rsu unti funti junti funti pply pt ing fng nga jng Q25PHCPU Parameter status r Mode E iO Address 10 20 30 40 System monitor ofil z2 3 4 Online module change Powe Intelli None None None None z 8 rsu Q25PHCPU gent Diagnostics pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status Bw Module system error g Module error 1 Module warming Beera Detailed inf of power supply El Module change Stop monitor Ua 7 15 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M als 26 fel ceries b Click the Execution button to enable a module change i Online module change S Operation Target module i Module change execution 1 0 address O00H o 5 ee Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart a Change module selection completed Z Status Guidance E Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the 2 oO intelligent function module 5 2 gt O nO no Zz O If t
132. alog value set as a User range setting 4000 normal resolution mode offset Valu by Ih6AISSE Sin valu iby the user 12000 high resolution mode i 9 y 0 to 20mA OmA OmA 20mA 4 to 20mA 4mA 4mA 20mA 2 Cur 4 to 20mA extended mode 4mA 4mA 20mA 2 z lt rent Anal hen the digital val F Cente ete een nates VESIS Analog value set as an Analog value set as a o User range setting 4000 normal resolution mode offset value bY thecuser nin valley the user 3 12000 high resolution mode y 9 M 2 Table3 5 The lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range Q66AD DG Input Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value Z 0 to 20mA OMA 20mA o 4 to 20mA 4mA 20mA a cP 4 to 20mA extended mode 4mA 20mA 9 4 S Analog value set as a tow User range setting Analog value set as an offset value by the user a Wo gain value by the user 590 mAn eeeeeeoaoeaceaoeoeeoeaeeeeeoeoeeeeeaoeeeeeoeeeeeeeaeeeeeoeeeeeeee ee ee nom w oT 5 exe ne a Z Zo es ayn 592 O zZ T pa 0 Oo a a w E gt a S L zZ oz ZT OO 0 Z O O T 73 w ao O ra Ee 3 2 Function List 3 21 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function 3 Input signal error detection upper limit value Input signal error detection lower limit value 3 22 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 8 Setting example of input signal error
133. alue 0 R W 26H 38 CH5 Maximum value 0 R W 27H 39 CH5 Minimum value 0 R W 28H 40 CH6 Maximum value 0 R W 29H 41 CH6 Minimum value 0 R W 2AH 42 to to System area 2EH 46 Input signal error detection extended input signal error y i 2FH 47 i 003FH RIW 2 Section 3 4 11 detection setting 30H 48 Warning output setting 3F3FuH RIW 2 Section 3 4 12 31H 49 Input signal error detection flag 0 R Section 3 4 13 2 Warni tput flag P 0 R 32H 50 aming output flag Process alarm Section 3 Ai 33H 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 0 R 34H 52 System area 35H 53 Scaling enable disable setting 003FH R W 2 Section 3 4 15 36H 54 CH1 Scaling value 0 R 37H 55 CH2 Scaling value 0 R 38H 56 CH3 Scaling value 0 R i Section 3 4 16 39H 57 CH4 Scaling value 0 R 3AH 58 CH5 Scaling value 0 R 3Bu 59 CH6 Scaling value 0 R 3CH 60 System area 3DH 61 3EH 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 3Fu 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 RIW 2 40H 64 CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 41H 65 CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 RW Section 3 4 17 42H 66 CH3 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 43H 67 CH3 Scaling upper limit value 0 RW 444 68 CH4 Scaling lower limit value 0 RW 45H 69 CH4 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer m
134. arm warning detection period See am WO N rea 3 68 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 20 CH rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 4 21 CHO rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 1 For each channel set the range of change rate of digital output values OVERVIEW 2 To validate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 The setting range is 32768 to 32767 3276 8 to 3276 7 Set the value in 0 1 s increments Example When setting the rate alarm upper limit value to 30 s store 300 into the buffer memory CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 4 Refer to Section 3 2 4 for details of the rate alarm 2 z E lt Q L O wW a N BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 69 3 4 21 CH rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 22 CHO input signal error detection setting value CH Input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 CHO Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 1 Set the value upper limit setting value and lower limit setting value by which an error of the input analog value will be detec
135. arning output flag process alarm lower limit value Disable CH1 Warming output flag process alarm Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Execute test Details Select input Monitoring Setting range Enable Disable b After making sure that the indication in the Current value field of CH A D conversion enable disable setting is Disable change the Setting value field of Operating condition setting request to Setting request and click the Execute test button to stop conversion Monitor the A D conversion completion flag Un G10 and confirm that conversion has stopped CH1 Operating condition setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Module model name Q68AD G Start 170 No 0000 Setting item CH1 Warning output flag rate alarm upper limit value Current value Setting value CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value CH1 Rate alarm waming detection period CH1 Input signal error detection flag CH1 Input signal error detection setting Disable CH1 Input signal error detection setting value CH1 Scaling enable disable setting X 5 Disable CH1 Scaling lower limit value CH1 Scaling upper limit value Operating condition setting request v tt 0 Setting request Flash ROM setting Current value isplay Mak
136. art 120 No 0020 Module model name Q68AD G Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer word count PLC side 2 Transfer Device direction wi w2 w3 CH1 Digital output value gt CH2 Digital output value gt CH3 Digital output value gt CH4 Digital output value gt CH5 Digital output value gt gt gt gt gt CHE Digital output value CH Digital output value CH8 Digital output value CH1 Maximum value Make text file End setup Cancel 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 5 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING M eLS eG cries c Writing the intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 5 3 3 The intelligent function module parameters are written to the remote I O station z This operation is performed using the intelligent function module parameter setting module select screen z 3 Programming example z Read digital output values 2 X21 X120 X12E Y129 K MOV Wi D1 J Read the CH1 digital output value 5 o iL mov W2 D2 J Read the CH2 digital output value 5 53 mov W3 D3 Aea MS CrS digital output value Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence SM400 i Read the warning 1 rov w6 kamo output flag Process alarm E O Read the warning E o Os Kao output flag Rate alarm 3
137. asures No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with EMC and Low Voltage Directives GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following general terms and abbreviations General term Abbreviation Description A D converter module A generic term for the Q68AD G and Q66AD DG DOS V personal computer An IBM PC AT or compatible computer with DOS V GX Developer The product name of the software package for the MLSEC programmable controllers GX Works2 k The abbreviation for the analog digital converter module setting and monitor tool GX Configura GX Configurator AD tor AD SW2D5C QADU E A generic term for the QOOJCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU QS50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU QCPU Q mode Process CPU A generic term for the QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Personal computer A generic term for DOS V personal computers i A generic term for analog input ranges 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to Industrial shipment setting 20mA FB The abbreviation for function block
138. ate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 The setting range is 10 to 5000ms The value can be set in 1ms increments but the first digit is rounded down and the value is processed in 10ms increments 4 When time averaging or count averaging has been specified for averaging process specification set the rate alarm warning detection period as a multiple of the time averaging or count averaging conversion period Example When the number of channels is 5 and if the count value set for the count averaging is 10 the conversion cycle for count averaging is 10 times x 5 CH x 10 ms 500 ms Therefore set a multiple of 500 such as 1500 or 3000 to the rate alarm warning detection period 5 The default setting is Oms 6 Refer to Section 3 2 4 for details of the rate alarm Point 1 Ifa value outside the above setting range is written to a channel an error occurs and an error code is stored into the Error code Un G19 The Error flag XF turns ON and the time or count averaging or rate alarm processing is performed based on the setting before the error detection Since the default setting is 0 change the setting If the upper limit value and lower limit value settings of the rate alarm are small the warning output may turn ON due to overreaction to disturbance or like This overreaction can be avoided by increasing the setting of the rate al
139. ation The LED ON status is displayed z LED name 00004 Indicates that LED is unlit ERR LED 00014 Indicates that LED is lit 2 Alternate display of 0000H and 0001H Indicates that LED is flash m ALM LED zZ ing 2 BS Be b H W SW information The status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed No Switch setting for intelligent function module RANGE Z Switch 1 2 1 lt o RANGE m Switch 2 O 2 W Q Switch 3 2 RANGE Switch 4 3 z O Switch 5 E gi 955 lt a 2 596 H W Information fi nom Module Module Name Q684D G Product information 07031 0000000000 C HAW LED Information HAW SW Information ind ME og ge Q0 awk gt Z 2o I2 582 o zZ Fa f0 A Stop monitor W E a For GX Developer Version 8 Q Lu z ri Z fe ausXo 0 m gt elene cme CHANGE 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 8 8 2 6 Checking the A D converter module status using GX Developer system monitor APPENDIX MELSEC TA eries APPENDIX Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated instruction list The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used with the A D converter modules Reference sec Instruction Description i tion Switches to the offset gain setting mode G P OFFGAN Appendix 1 1 Switches to the normal mode Reads the offset gain values of the user range setting to the G P OGLOAD Appendix 1 2 CPU G
140. ation only one scan after RUN initialization is not performed 2 When used on remote I O networ Insert a user device that will execute initialization at any timing initialization request signal into the sequence program After control resumption turn ON the initialization request signal to perform initialization If the sequence program performs initialization only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network initialization is not performed 7 29 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M aL 26 fel ceries 5 Resumption of control r 7 W a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to gt redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to z resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change z Operation Target module 2 Module change execution 1 0 address 000H PE Module name Q684D G 2 Installation confirmation We Status 2 6 Module control restart s d nO Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions N and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted 5 Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute E o L O W Q N Cancel b The Online module change completed screen appears a
141. b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0215n CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 11 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting Un G47 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 12 Warning output settings Un G48 1 This area is used to set whether the process alarm rate alarm warning is to be output or stopped on a channel basis OVERVIEW 2 To validate the warning output setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 By default all channels are set to disable b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Un G48 Rate alarm setting Process alarm setting 0 Enable 1 Disable For Q66AD DG information of b6 b7 b14 b15 is fixed at 0 2 Zz O lt o E S W a N Setting example of Q68AD G When process alarm warning output is enabled for channel 1 and rate alarm warning output is enabled for channel 3 FBFEH is stored into Un G48 E E b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bli bO oe W 1 1 1 1 1 04 1 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 O FBFEH 256 zg CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 ngg nom F B F E 5 Setting exampl
142. cannot be used as an add in with GX Developer Version 3 or earlier versions In addition GX Developer Version 8 or later is necessary to use the FB conversion function When Windows Vistaor Windows 7 is used resolution of 1024 x 768 dots or more is recommended When 32 bit Windows 7 is used add GX Configurator AD Version 2 11M or later in GX Devel oper Version 8 91V or later When 64 bit Windows 7 is used add GX Configurator AD Version 2 11M or later in GX Devel oper Version 8 98C or later 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 5 2 2 Operating environment 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries Operating system and performance required for personal computer g Performance required for personal computer Operating system CPU z Windows 95 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more ce 7 Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more O Windows Me Pentium 150MHz or more 32MB or more Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more a Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133MHz or more 64MB or more Windows XP Pentium 300MHz or more 128MB or more Windows Vista Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more E L l z a 1GB or more 32 bit ao Windows 7 Pentium 1GHz or more 2GB or more 64 bit Point o 1 The functions shown below are not available for Windows XP Windows z Vista and Windows 7 i A E F W If any of the fo
143. ce program After control resumption turn ON the initialization request signal to perform initialization If the sequence program performs initialization only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network initialization is not performed 7 13 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M aL 26 fel ceries 5 Resumption of control r W a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to gt redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to z resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change Operation Target module E Module change execution 1 0 address oooH z 2 ait Module name Q684D G 5 Installation confirmation F oO m Module control restart Staus h r D z Change module installation completion 2 2 r Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted E Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute 0 z o L Oo W Q Cancel n b The Online module change completed screen appears z 3 n MELSOFT series GX Developer ag Zoo ey aa 2 Online module change completed So FOL wo i nom 5 We S Q0 ao Zz EG IZ 582 oO Z o O A A w 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0
144. changing the operating condition insert an interlock to prevent the execution of the REMFR instruction 1 Operating GX Developer CPU parameter setting MNET H Remote master 0000H 1 1 Online Network type Starting I O No Network No Total stations Mode Network range assignment M station gt A station M station lt A station StationNo Y Ne x x Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End 256 0100 DIFF 256 0000 OOFF 256 0100 DIFF 256 0000 00FF M station gt A station M station lt R station M station gt A station M station lt A station eee ae Re ea W Refresh parameters Dev name Points Transfer SB Transfer SW Link side Start Dev name Paints PLC side Random cyclic Random cyclic Transferl Transfer Transfer Transfer4 Transfer5 Transfer 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Programming example a F gt Remote I O station operating status checking Pe 5847 aroi i Master station baton pass status 2 Q A O checking SB49 a i Master station data link status checking weve re Remote I O station baton pass
145. channel basis This setting is valid only for the channels that use input ranges of 4 to 20mA 2 wire transmitter O4 or User range setting 2 wire transmitter F4 and that are set as conversion enabled in the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO It is ignored in the case of any other setting 2 To validate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 66 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 16 CH scaling value storage area Un G54 to Un G671 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 5 E Point MELSEC TE eries The setting range is 0 to 3276 7 seconds 0 to 54 minutes and 36 7 seconds 0 to 32767 Set the time in 100ms increments Example When setting the A D conversion starting time to 5 seconds store 50 into the buffer memory The default is set to 3 seconds 30 Refer to Section 3 2 5 for details of the conversion starting time setting function If a value outside the above setting range is written to a channel an error occurs and an error code is stored into the Error code Un G19 In this case the opera tion is performed based on the setting before the error detection 3 4 19 CHO process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 1 For each channel set a range of digital output values 2 3 4 5 E Point To validate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Ref
146. ction SH400 mov X11 XOG uo G10 K2M0 1 D11 2 D12 Ki D13 nce 6 Kan 7 KAN3O Processing at warning occurrence Processing at warning occurrence Processing at warning occurrence Processing at warming occurrence Da K2N50 Processing at error detection SET YOF Error code display and reset processing Al2 XOF BCD D9 K3Y20 SET YOF YOF XOG XOF t RST YOF TEND 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 2 2 Programming example using the utility package MELSEC TE eries Read the A D conversion completed flag Read the CH1 digital output value Read the CH2 digital output value Read the CH3 digital output value Read the warning output flag Process alarm Read the warning output flag Rate alarm Processing at CH2 process alarm upper limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH2 process alarm lower limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate alarm upper limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate alarm lower limit value warning occurrence Read the input signal error detection flag Processing at CH1 input signal error detection Turn ON the error clear request YF Output the error code in BCD Turn ON the error clear request YF Turn OFF the error clear request YF 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries
147. ction extended Input signal error detection set ting Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection lower limit setting value BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value lower limit value 2 The data for which initial setting has been completed is registered in the parameters for the programmable controller CPU and automatically writ ten to the A D converter module when the programmable controller CPU changes to the RUN status 1 Sets auto refresh for the A D converter module buffer memory a fe E lt q Ss zo n WL 0 oO x lt 2 a q Auto refresh 2 The buffer memory that was set for auto refresh is automatically read and setting written to the specified device when the END command for the program mable controller CPU is executed 1 Monitor Test The buffer memory and I O signals for the A D converter modules are Section 5 5 monitored and tested PROGRAMMING 2 Operating condition setting Changes the initial setting during operation 3 Offset gain setting When setting the offset gain to a value selected by the user when the analog output range setting is user range setting the offset and gain can be easily set while viewing the screen 4 Pass data The pass data industrial shipment settings offset gain values user range settings of
148. ction lower limit setting val 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 4 Based on an input signal error detection setting value input signal error upper and lower limit setting values an input signal upper and lower limit values are calculated as shown below The calculated values vary depending on the input range a Input signal error detection upper limit value gain value of corresponding range gain value of corresponding range offset value of corresponding range x input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 1000 b Input signal error detection lower limit value lower limit value of corresponding range gain value of corresponding range offset value of corresponding range x input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection lower limit setting value 1000 1 For the lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range refer to Point 3 in this section Example When same upper limit value lower limit value is selected for the input signal error detection extended setting setting 15 150 to the input signal error detection setting value in the Q68AD G Resolution mode High resolution mode Used range User range setting Offset value 5mA Gain value 18mA In this setting because the lower limit value is an analog value at the time the digital value is 12000 it is 8mA Therefore the input signa
149. d 3 74 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 25 Factory default and User range settings offset gain value Un G202 to Un G233 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEGC KE cries W 5 A gt 4 1 Handling Precautions G D 1 Do not drop the module or subject it to heavy impact Z 2 Do not remove the PCB of the module from its case Doing so may cause the module to fail 2 oO fe fe 3 Be careful not to let foreign particles such as swarf or wire chips enter the module 26 They may cause a fire mechanical failure or malfunction 4 The top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent foreign 7 objects such as wire burrs from entering the module during wiring 5 Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete z Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate i ventilation a 5 Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Loose screws may cause short circuits failures or malfunctions wo 2 Screw location Tightening torque range Wy a Sar 50 Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 Nim W Connector screw M2 6 screw 0 20 to 0 29 Nm g FG terminal screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58 Nim BE 6 To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower we part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection into the hole in the base 5 a 0 unit and press the mo
150. ded mode current input Cy 7 2 Online Module Change Operations T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure There are the following online module change procedures depending on whether the user z range setting has been made or not whether the initial setting of GX Configurator AD has z been made or not and whether the other system exists or not Range setting Initial setting Other system Reference section Z Industrial shipment setting GX Configurator AD Section 7 3 1 FE Industrial shipment setting Sequence program Section 7 3 2 oe User range setting GX Configurator AD Present Section 7 3 3 Hi z User range setting GX Configurator AD Absent Section 7 3 4 gt 6 User range setting Sequence program Present Section 7 3 5 User range setting Sequence program Absent Section 7 3 6 A Zz O lt S u O W Q o Zz O of PETs lt a a a 53900 mAn oom GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 4 T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD 1 Conversion disable a Set the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channel conversion disable and turn operating condition setting req
151. der Bl Body Popa re aroue a Ready fa Foststaton 5 32 5 8 Usage of FB 5 8 2 Paste an FB to a sequence program 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries 5 8 3 Convert compile a sequence program f Purpose of operation Convert compile the sequence program to which an FB was pasted so that it can be i executed O Z fa ke ya Jal eleke le eeek ne x A ian T AD FB FB1 eee a 5 Z f z AE 2 fa z O m O W D Trajea e ie a z ase ie fe Operation procedure p id Click the Convert menu Convert Compile menu of GX Developer A P i 89 Wo W nam e4 fo lt toa lt gt lt 0 hi fo S x lt o a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 8 Usage of FB 5 33 5 8 3 Convert compile a sequence program 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 6 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the programs of the A D converter modules When applying any of the program examples introduced in this chapter to the actual system verify the applicability and confirm that no problems will occur in the system control 6 1 Programming Procedure In the following procedure create a program that will execute the analog digital conversion of the A D converter module
152. der as needed Relevant Manuals Manual number Manual name model code GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SPORIS ZIE Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging 13JU41 Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block SH 080376E Operating methods of GX Developer such as creating and printing function blocks Sold separately 13JU44 GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common SH 080779ENG System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and Structured 13JU63 project of GX Works2 Sold separately Printed manuals are available separately Please place an order with the manual number model code in the table above COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC LOW VOLTAGE AND MACHINERY DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or head module The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional me
153. detection Example To detect an input signal error when the analog input value falls below 2 4mA in the channel where the input range of 4 to 20mA extended mode and the normal resolution mode is set Apply the following values to the calculation formula for an input signal error detection lower limit value e Input signal error detection lower limit value 2 4mA e Lower limit value of the input range offset value 4 0mA e Gain value 20 0mA Lower limit value of each _ Input signal error detection Input signal error detection _ ange upper limit value x 1000 setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range Therefore Set 100 10 0 as an input signal error detection setting value The input signal error detection values act as follows in this case Because of the set ting value of 100 10 an error is detected not only at 2 4mA but also at 21 6mA 21 6mA 1 6mA 10 0 of 1 6mA 16mA Gain value Offset value 1 6mA 10 0 of 1 6mA 2 4mA 3 2 Function List 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 9 Specifying a condition to detect input signal errors By setting the following buffer memory areas input signal errors can be detected only at an upper limit value or lower limit value or at different upper lower limit values e Input signal error detection extended input signal error de
154. digit value per rate alarm warning detection period The expression for the value used to make judgment per rate alarm warning E L detection period is as follows as Value used to make judgment per rate alarm warning detection period digit rate alarm upper limit value or lower limit value x 0 001 x maximum value of the z digital output value x rate alarm warning detection period 1000 lt Example 5 In channel 1 when the following e Upper limit value of change rate 30 s 300 is stored in buffer memory e Maximum digital output value 16000 oe e Rate alarm warning detection period 10ms 9 wo are set a value digit used at every rate alarm warning detection period can be a Be calculated as follows ear 300 x 0 001 x 16000 x 10 1000 48 digit Therefore the current value is compared with the previous value every 10ms in be 2 channel 1 and whether a difference of 48 digit or more is identified between S them or not is determined ze Zz Zo f The rate alarm is useful to watch the varying rate of the digital output value in a Eo limited range gt 24 1 Example of setting the rate alarm upper limit value lower limit value when it is desired to watch that the digital output value increases within the specified 7 Zz range Z Varying rate of digital A E A Rate alarm upper limit value g 30 x oa 20 Rate alarm lower limit value A a S oz CS a OO 0 Z gt Tim
155. dule until it snaps into place g Improper installation may result in a module malfunction or may cause the module to ES fall off 569 oO Z lt L ug 0 O a oa W E a S LW z9 oz CS a OO 0 O O E N W a O ra 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 1 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 2 MELSEC TE eries 4 1 1 Attaching a module fixing bracket Q66AD DG only After mounting the Q66AD DG on the base unit fix the module with a module fixing bracket Point Make sure that the module fixing bracket is hooked on the 3rd slit viewed from the front of Q66AD DG And tighten the module fixing screw at the specified torque Module fixing screw 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 1 1 Attaching a module fixing bracket Q66AD DG only 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC KE cries 4 2 Setup and Procedures before Operation OVERVIEW Star Module mounting Mount the A D converter module in the specified slot Wiring Wire external devices to the A D converter module Intelligent function module switch settings Perform settings using GX Developer Refer to Section 4 5 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Use factory defaults settings SPECIFICATIONS Use user range settings Use user range settings Offset gain setting If user range settings are used perform the offset and gain settings
156. dundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS Print Date Manual Number The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision Oct 2006 SH NA 080647ENG A First edition Jan 2007 Jan 2008 May 2008 Oct 2008 Sep 2011 Feb 2012 SH NA 080647ENG B SH NA 080647ENG C SH NA 080647ENG D SH NA 080647ENG E SH NA 080647ENG F SH NA 080647ENG G Correction Section 3 3 2 3 4 12 4 6 2 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 5 1 6 5 2 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 Section 2 1 Section 2 3 Section 3 2 1 Section 3 4 1 Section 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 6 1 Section 4 6 2 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 3 2 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 6 1 Section 5 6 4 Section 5 6 5 Section 7 3 3 Section 7 3 5 Section 8 1 Appendix 1 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Appendix 1 3 Addition Section 2 2 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Direc tives About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 1 2 3 Section 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 Section 4 1 4 3 Section 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 Chapter 7 Section 7 1 Correction Section 2 1 Section 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 6 3 3 2 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 4 3 4 7 3 4 9 3 4 11 3 4 12 3 4 13 3 4 22 Section 4 3
157. e status gt Module Detailed Information 2 Module Detail Information a Checking the function version and product information The function version and product information of the A D converter module are displayed in the product information field b Checking the error code The error code stored in buffer memory address 19 Un G19 of the A D converter module is displayed in the Present Error field When the Error History button is pressed the contents displayed in the Present Error field are displayed in the No 1 field Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name Q684D G Product information 07031 0000000000 C 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status ame Input Type e Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Error Display Display format No ErorCode Present Eror No Error E HEX C DEC Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under HAW Information 8 7 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn ON during use in normal mode 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 3 H W information W a H W LED inform
158. e 36 S CH4 Digital output value 36 oxen CHS Digital output value 36 5 oQ CHE Digital output value 96 CH7 Digital output value 98 CH8 Digital output value 96 CH1 scaling value ii CH2 scaling value i Flash ROM setting Details oO ore ee Monitoring Zz soe Cannot execute test Make text file a oO O x a Stop monitor Ww a 5 a ie Ww z z e W 1 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 24 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE T 25 5 Resumption of control ELSEG seres a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address O00H Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation Status Change module installation completion Module control restart r Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel b The Online module change completed screen appears MELSOFT series GX Developer X e J Online module change completed 7 3 Online Module Change
159. e Current value field 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 1 Monitor test screen 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC KE eries 5 6 2 Offset gain setting operation bd s Perform the offset gain setting operation in the following sequence O 1 Switch to the offset gain setting screen Perform the operation in Section 5 6 1 to display the offset gain setting screen At this point a dialog box to confirm the transition of module s operation mode normal ke mode gt offset gain setting mode is displayed Click the Yes button to transit to E the offset gain setting mode i 26 nO Offset Gain setting Offset gain settings is performed Current module Q684D G 0000H Error code jel E fa z Offset setting Channel Setting state Ser Seun ee Gaetan ists Offset setting Gain setting Gain setting g N Conversion characteristic gi 955 E m 96 ma nam 2 Specify channels Place check marks in Channel selection column to specify the channels for each of which the offset or gain setting is to be made K g 29 2 3 Apply current voltage x5 Apply current or voltage to the module Note that Current only is allowed for the sai Q66AD DG 2 4 Execute offset gain setting For each of the channels specified in 2 click the Offset setting or Gain setting S button to execute respective setting s W 5 a S oz CS a OO 0 zZ E O O E l
160. e O E i a O ra E 3 2 Function List 3 27 3 2 4 Warning output function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 2 Example of setting the rate alarm upper limit value lower limit value when it is desired to watch that the digital output value decreases within the specified range A Varying rate of digital output value Rate alarm upper limit value 20 30 X Rate alarm lower limit value 7 gt Time 3 Example of setting the rate alarm upper limit value lower limit value when it is desired to watch that the digital output value increases decreases within the specified range A Varying rate of digital output value Rate alarm upper limit value 10 109 x Rate alarm lower limit value gt Time 3 28 3 2 Function List 3 2 4 Warning output function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE cries 3 2 5 Conversion starting time setting function Q66AD DG only 1 As the A D conversion starting time set the time necessary from when the used 2 wire transmitter powers on until its output stabilizes This setting allows A D conversion processing to be started as soon as the output of the 2 wire transmitter stabilizes OVERVIEW 2 Set the time to the CHO Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter Un G78 to Un G83 3 The following indicates the time until the A D conversion completed flag Un G10 turns ON when the A D conversio
161. e SSS ea High resolution mode 4095 40007 777 f j 4000 4096 F 4 Digital output value e Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital output value 2 0 to 5V Analog input practical range T High resolution mode 12287 12000 4095 4000 0 96 288 0 5 Analog input voltage V 4 0 to 10V Analog input practical range 19200 eee Se tee ee ee oe ee eee TOODUD T E SS SS A ee es a E High resolution mode 4005 b soe esa eee seas es a7oe Ste Se8la 5 mee AND aan Sas eee eRe safe Sees Teni T I 0 I 0 Se Seeger ges ae eae E 384 Normal resolution mode 1 I I I I I I I I I 1 I fi 1 0 Analog input voltage V Fig 3 1 Voltage input characteristic of Q68AD G 1 2 3 6 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 10 to 10V Analog input practical range 16383 16000 Z w gt D Oo 4095 en a g 4000 77 7 7 7 O 5 E o 3 0 3 g fe L 400b NE A 4096 ot 5 QS a no 16000 beso eee e kt 2 oe ee Analog input voltage V Fig 3 1 Voltage input characteristic of Q68AD G 2 2 Point 2 z E lt Q L O wW a N Zz O 1 Set within the analog input range and digital output range for
162. e been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeabl
163. e model name Q684D G oom Setting item Current value Setting value A D conversion completed flag 0000000011111111 CH1 Digital output value ag CH2 Digital output value we CH3 Digital output value oO CH4 Digtal output value ae CHS Digital output value SRO CHE Digital output value 2 L CH7 Digital output value gt z CHE Digtal output value E8 CH1 scaling value ayn EmO Dale Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring T display Cannot execute test Make text file 0 a Stop monitor g O x a Ww 5 a ie Ww z z e W 0 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure T 8 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA eries 5 Resumption of control a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change r Operation r Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H 3 he Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation ar ae Module control restart x f Change module installation completion r Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and exec
164. e of Q66AD DG OS When process alarm warning output is enabled for channel 2 and rate alarm warning 53 output is enabled for channel 4 373DH is stored into Un G48 Ez 5O b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO ESS of ofif ofli file eel of Javan CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 z 3 7 3 D o O a oa W E fa S Ja lt E OO 0 zZ O O E N W a O ae 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 63 3 4 12 Warning output settings Un G48 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 13 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 1 If the analog input value detected falls outside the setting range sets to the CHO input signal error detection setting value CHU Input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 or CHO input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 the Input signal error detection flag for the corresponding channel turns to 1 2 By bringing the analog input value within the setting range and turning ON the Error clear request YF the Input signal error detection flag turns OFF 3 If an error is detected on any one of the channels for which input signal error detection is enabled the Input signal error detection signal XC also turns ON 4 When the operating condition setting request Y9 is turned ON the Input signal error detection flag is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO For
165. e or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies SPREAD Copyright C 1996 Farpoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080647ENG G SH NA 080647ENG G 1202 MEE MODEL Q A D D G U SY E MODEL CODE 13JR96 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
166. e text file Stop monitor Execute test Details Select input Monitoring v v Setting range No request Setting request 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system 7 20 SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA cries c If the saved buffer memory contents are not yet prerecorded record them in the following procedure 1 Display the pass data screen of GX Configurator AD 2 Set the pass data classification setting and make a pass data read request Refer to Section 5 6 3 5 6 4 3 Compare the current values of the industrial shipment settings and user range settings offset gain values with those of the range reference table Refer to Section 7 4 for the range reference table 4 Ifthe values are proper record the offset gain values of the pass data classification setting industrial shipment settings and user range settings 1 The Q66AD DG does not require the setting and recording of the pass data classification setting EJ Point If the buffer memory values compared with the reference table are not proper save and restoration of the user range cannot be executed Before ex
167. e time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Averaging process specification Un G24 Un G25 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting Un G47 Warning output settings Un G48 Operating Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 Y9 condition setting CHO scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G72 request CHO conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter Un G78 to Un G83 CHO process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 CHO rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 CHO rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 CHO input signal error detection setting value CH input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 CHO input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 2 Refer to the X9 column for ON OFF timing In offset gain setting mode 1 This turns ON when the value for the adjusted offset gain settings are registered in the A D converter module o 2 Refer to the XA column for ON OFF timing User range writing YA fava Refer to Section 4 6 for offset gain settings In normal mode 1 This signal turns ON when the user range is restored 2 Refer to the field of XA for the ON OFF timing Refer to Chapter 7 for user range restoration 1 This turns ON when changing the channel for which offset gain settings are to be performed Channel c
168. ePLc gt Main base c Unmo Unmo Unmo u unti unti unti a ng ng ng c Q25PHCPU aj g a la Parameter status Mode E p iO Address 20 30 System monitor 0 2 3 Online module change Powe None None rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16pt 16pt Status Module system error B Module error H Detailed inf of power supply Module change d Enable the conversion of the channel to be used in A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Monitor CH O digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion is processed normally e Since the new module is in a default status it must be initialized by a sequence program after control resumption Before performing initialization check whether the contents of the initialization program are correct or not 1 Normal system configuration The sequence program should perform initialization on the leading edge of Module READY X9 of the A D converter module When control resumption is executed Module READY X0 turns ON and initialization is performed If the sequence program performs initialization only one scan after RUN initialization is not performed 2 When used on remote I O network Insert a user device that will execute initialization at any timing initialization request signal into the sequen
169. each input z range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy 4 id H TE pe z 290 may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid use shown by the 1AN eee SOS dotted lines in Fig 3 1 FOr 2 Do not input an analog input voltage of 15V or less and 15V or more The G28 input elements may be damaged 3 Set the offset gain values for the User range setting marked within a range Me which satisfies the following conditions SE eo a Offset value gain value setting range 10 to 10V as b Use one of the following formulas according to the resolution mode to be ES set pOg 1 Normal resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 1 5V 2 High resolution mode g Gain value Offset value 4 0V Z 4 When an analog value that exceeds the range for the digital output value is 9 entered the digital output value will be fixed at the maximum or minimum x value Analog input Normal resolution mode High resolution mode O M a E E gt 4 96 288 12287 A g 4095 au 10 to 10V 4096 16384 Ze 16383 5 0 to 10V 96 384 2T OO 1 to 5V 1096 4595 3288 13787 Extended mode User range setting 4096 4095 12288 12287 S O a i z O E 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 7 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS Digital output value Digital output value b Current input characteristic MELSEC TA eries Fig 3 2 shows a graph of the current input characteristic
170. ecautions on System Configuration 2 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA ries 2 3 Howto Check the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 1 Checking the function version and serial No The serial No and function version of the A D converter module can be checked on the rating plate front of the module and system monitor of GX developer a On the rating plate The rating plate is put on the side of the A D converter module MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No Upper 5 digits Function version Relevant regulation G standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b On the front of the module The function version and serial No on the rating plate is also indicated on the front of the module lower part 10 10V 0 20mA Lo Vye 12000000000 Function version 2 6 2 3 How to Check the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEGC TE eries c On the system monitor product information list To display the system monitor select Diagnostics System moni tor Product Inf List of GX Developer OVERVIEW Serial Function Product No version No Product Information List Sort Order by Installation Order by Type Name o 5z a O Base Slot Type Series Model Name Point A ee meae Serial No Ver Production Number CPU CPU Q QO6
171. ect terminals V and referring to Section 4 4 2 Point The module may be faulty if the digital output values cannot be read after proper corrective actions have been taken according to the above check items Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining the detailed description of the problem 8 6 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 4 When the digital output values cannot be read OVERVIEW SYSTEM CONFIGU RATION SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE ausXo 0 m gt elene cme CHANGE 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries 8 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn ON during use in normal mode Is 24VDC external supply power being supplied Q66AD DG Check that the external supply power terminals between terminals aniy No A19 and A20 or B19 and B20 are supplied with a 24VDC voltage Is an input signal error being generated Check the input signal error detection flag Un G49 8 2 6 Checking the A D converter module status using GX Developer system monitor When the A D converter module detail information is selected in GX Developer system monitor error code LED ON status and status of the intelligent function module switch setting can be checked 1 Operating GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Select the A D conversion module checking th
172. ecting the offset value and gain value when the analog signals voltage or current input from outside the programmable controller are converted to digital values OVERVIEW Offset value The offset value denotes the analog input value voltage or current that makes the digital output value 0 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Gain value The gain value denotes the analog input value voltage or current that makes the digital output value 4000 in normal resolution mode 16000 12000 in high resolution mode o Z Q lt 9 O W a 7 BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 5 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 1 Input characteristics of Q68AD G a Voltage input characteristic Fig 3 1 shows a graph of the voltage input characteristic 1 1 to 5V Analog input practical range p High resolution mode piee i PEE l esent ennn m m TU ARER eS I AR Normal resolution mode DAOC Bee a A m ra a RS SSE a a a ae a Sie gt 5 2 0 J Q6 ee PK KH O 750 a am m a on a a e A E SS E eel T 288 i i 1 1 D 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 l l l l 1 1 1 l l l 1 l 1 1 1 1 L L 01 5 e Analog input voltage V 3 10 to 10V Analog input practical range 16383 fe etre ae rec oo RRS a ee Slo
173. ecuting module control resumption make offset gain setting in the GX Configurator AD Refer to Section 5 6 2 Note that if module control is resumed without offset gain setting being made operation will be performed with the default values 2 Dismounting of module a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode double click the module to be changed online to display the Online module change screen System Monitor Installed status 1 2 3 MasterPLC gt Base Base Module Main base Powe rsu pply Q25PHCPU Unmo Uno unti funti ng ng Unmoj unti ng Parameter status o Address 10 20 40 4 1 30 3 Powe rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16 None None 16pt 16pt None 16pt Status E Module system error B Module change B Module error 7 21 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system E Module warning Stop monitor Mode System monitor Online module change Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Detailed inf of power supply Close T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M IES 26 fel ceries
174. ed as an interlock condition to turn ON OFF the User range writing request YA a when the user range is restored 2 Refer to Chapter 7 for the user range restoration lt gt Performed by the A D converter module L gt Performed by the sequence program wl Module ready X0 ON a y y z Offset gain setting mode flag XA Z ri 2 1 2 N 2 N P Q id User range writing request YA aati a Wg 1 This signal is used as an interlock condition for setting the channel change request YB to ON 8 Q OFF when changing the channel for which the offset gain settings are to be performed D A 0 2 Refer to Section 4 6 regarding the offset gain settings gt Performed by the A D converter module i Performed by the sequence program ka amp E Og Offset gain setting mode 3 XB Channel change Offset gain specifications k m completed flag Un G22 Un G23 2 9 ayn 568 Pid 4 Channel change completed i 4 flag XB k 1 d a Channel change request YB S z o fe ow oa W E Q S LW z9 a lt ZE exe 0 Z E O I H W a fe v4 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 37 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device No XC 3 38 Signal Name Input signal error detection signal 1 MELSEC TE eries Description This signal turns ON when the analog input value falls outside the setting range set to the Inp
175. ed time ms mi wo ZZ az Ze OO 0 zZ O O E N w a O ae 3 2 Function List 3 17 3 2 1 A D conversion methods 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 18 MELSEC TE eries 3 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold function 1 The maximum and minimum values are held in the buffer memory channel by channel 2 The maximum and minimum values are cleared to 0 when the maximum value minimum value reset request YD or operating condition setting request Y9 is turned ON and new maximum and minimum values are stored when conversion is started 3 Since the area for storing the maximum and minimum values can be rewritten with the sequence program the maximum and minimum values within a specific period of time can be checked 4 When the scaling function is enabled values after scaling conversion are stored as the maximum and minimum values For the scaling function refer to Section 3 2 6 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function 1 2 If the input voltage current rose to or above the input signal error detection upper limit value or fell to or below the lower limit value the input signal error detection flag Un G49 and input signal error detection signal XC turn ON and the ALM LED flickers to indicate the error When the input signal error detection flag Un G49 turns ON for a channel a digital output value immediately before the error detection is held for the channel and the A D conversion completed
176. eeee ee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeteeaaeees 6 11 6 3 1 Programming example using the utility package 0 ee eeeeeee eee eeeee eee eeettaeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaaes 6 14 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility DACKAGE ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeteeseetteeeeeeeeaaes 6 17 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 0 eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeenaeeees 6 21 6 4 1 Before creating a progra sis isic ceed atinecttiateicccead dk gectees AEREA ERE EEA etait adit 6 22 6 4 2 Programming example using the utility package 0 eee ceeeeee eee eetee eee eeettaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaes 6 24 6 4 3 Programming example without using the utility DACKAGE ee eeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaaes 6 27 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 000 ie ccceeceeeeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeeaaeeeetenaeees 6 30 6 5 1 Programming example using the utility package 0 eee ceceeee eee eeteeeeeeeettaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaes 6 32 6 5 2 Programming example without using the utility DACKAGE ee eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeentaeeeeeeetaaes 6 35 7 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 7 1 to 7 38 FAE Online Module Change Conditions ss aisesieii oni ea aaan A AARE NEREA EE ER 7 2 7 2 Online Module Change Operations sesiieesssseeeseneessrrnessenrnsssrinnaaattnnneestnnnansenadaaastannaaatanananatainnaana 7 3 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure ssssesssssseesessrnesernnnnesnnnnnenstennesetntnnenstnnnaanttta
177. eeeeess 5 28 G G P OFF GAN arie a aae E aai ots App 2 GP LOGLOAD se tisiiocccaussancudgentinas steavbiatecdeeewsadese App 4 GP LOGSTOR gerne aE ar REEE R aint nes App 8 Gain ValUG er ena EEES 3 5 GX Configurator AD 2 eececeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 4 5 1 GX Develope ie enei arais anani as a A 12 2 4 H HAN inmormantare EE AEEA ERATE 8 8 Handling Precautions 4 1 I I O assignment Setting cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 4 10 I O Characteristics ccccceceecccceeaeeseeeeeeeeeaees 3 1 3 3 Industrial shipment setting cc eeeeeeee eee A 12 Industrial shipment settings and User range settings Offset gain VAlUC eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaaees 3 74 Initial Setting Ate deed hate edie eels 5 14 INPULWANGS ss is fice cdei netic a tonne ete 3 58 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection Setting ccesccceeeeseceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneees 3 61 Input signal error detection flag 3 64 Input signal error detection function 3 18 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value A E A laldulerd a A 3 70 Input signal error detection setting value 3 70 Input signal error detection signal 0 ee 3 38 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value EAN AE EEE Me A E 3 70 Mush cUn iei aT A A 3 3 Installing oseni ee ae n aaae a 5 2 Insulation resistance cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaee sees 3 2 3 3 Intelligent function module paramet
178. efore cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in the module falling out short circuits or malfunction Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAM
179. em S 31 CH6 user range settings gain value System S 32 CH7 user range settings offset value System S 33 CH7 user range settings gain value System S 34 CH8 user range settings offset value System S 35 CH8 user range settings gain value System 1 Set only the pass data classification setting S 2 If data is written to the area set by the system the App 5 offset gain values will not be read properly Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices APPENDIX MELSEC Lal series Control data of Q66AD DG Device Item Set data Setting range Set by x S System area S Stores the status when the instruction is a S 1 Completion status compl te System k 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion ESS System area S 3 S 4 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 5 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value System fan S 6 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S S 7 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 8 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 9 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 10 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value
180. emory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memory writing condition ee ee ae 1 1 T Vf If t 1 MOV xk xk Writing Operating Operating request condition condition i setting sering request completed oe ae lla 8 22 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries Table3 9 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG 3 5 Aqdress Description Default Riw 1 Reference ipti u r ayeveveaiur 1 im Hexadecimal jiDeeimal 46H 70 CH5 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 2 m 4TH 71 CH5 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 3 _ Section 3 4 17 48H 72 CH6 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 49H 73 CH6 Scaling upper limit value 0 RIW 2 4Au 74 Z to to System area z 5 4Di 77 z 4Ex 78 CH1 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 R W 2 E L 4Fu 79 CH2 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 RIW 2 a 2 50H 80 CH3 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 RIW 2 PEETA ection 3 4 51H 81 CH4 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 RIW 2 52H 82 CH5 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 R W 2 2 53H 83 CH6 Conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter 30 R W 2 2 54y 84 3 System area L 55x 85 8 56H 86 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 RIw
181. enp END o az ES LO HO no Zz O q iS u O Ww a N z O gi ara 290 lt a a a 390 FOL Wo i nom 5 w oT 5 exe Fo i a Z Zo Eo ayn 582 e 12 z lt E 2 e ina a Ww E a S wo zZ oz CS a OOo oO zZ O O E N w a ae 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 10 6 2 3 Programming example without using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING 6 11 M ELSEG Q series 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 1 System configuration Remote master station Network No 1 Remote I O station Station No 1 QU71LP21 25 QX10 X20 to X2F QY10 Y30 to Y3F Q68AD G_ X Y120 to X Y12F QY10 X Y110 to X Y11F QX10 X Y100 to X Y10F QJ72LP25 25 2 Conditions for the intelligent function module switch setting Input range setting Normal resolution mode High resolution mode CH1 CH2 4 to 20mA High resolution mode CH3 CH4 to not used Based on the setting conditions given in the above make the intelligent function mod ule switch settings Select the I O assignment tab on the Intelligent function module switch settings screen and click Switch setting to set the following values Switch No Setting value Switch 1 0000H CH1 to CH3 4 to 20mA Switch 2 0000H CH4 to CH8 Default Switch 3 Switch 4 OFOOH High resolution mode Switch 5 0000 OH
182. er lower limit value within the range of 32000 to 32000 910 Lower limit 2 Upper limit O indicates the channel number set incorrectly 8 3 8 1 Error Code List In the scaling upper lower limit value setting Un G62 to Un G77 Set them again so that he scaling upper limit value is greater than the scaling lower limit value 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC KE eries Point 1 When two or more errors have occurred the latest error found by the A D a converter module is stored i 2 The error codes marked with 1 can be cleared by turning ON the error clear request YF 3 Error code 161 marked with 2 is not stored in the Error code Un G19 area It is written to the Completion status area S 1 of the G P OGSTOR E instruction 8 4 The error codes marked with 3 can be cleared by one of the following opera a tions T a Turning on the error clear request YF b Turning on the operating condition setting request Y9 after correcting the set value to the one in the setting range 2 r O m T D Zz 2 gi 955 E 90 eth oom We Og g5 G ne oz E8 HA O Zz L pa 0 Oo W 5 a Q 2 z O ausXo 0 m 3510o ee CHANGE 8 1 Error Code List 8 4 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 1 When the RUN LED is flashing or turned off 1 When flashing Check item Corrective action Reset s
183. er setting module selact sree eoa 5 11 Internal current consumption cccccccees 3 2 3 4 Isolation method cccceeseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 3 2 3 3 L List of I O Signals eeoa E a ETA 3 33 3 34 M Maximum and minimum values hold function 3 18 Maximum resolution 3 1 3 3 Maximum supply current 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 3 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag sa EE E N A E N E tres E EE E A 3 39 Maximum value minimum value reset request 3 40 Mode switching Setting 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 3 73 Module ready eesi naiera nnen aa aai 3 35 Monitor Te st sinciscvieda cite itwitle seine 5 18 MOVE averaging 00 ee eeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeaeeeees 3 13 Multiple CPU system 0 eeeeceeeteeeeeeettieeeeeeeee 2 3 N No omode S eeii a RT 2 1 Number of analog input points ce 3 1 3 3 Number of I O occupied points 3 2 3 3 Index 1 APPENDIX INDEX O Ofset yale eisean E E a 3 5 Offset gain setting 2 005 4 13 4 17 5 21 5 23 Offset gain setting change completed flag 3 38 Offset gain setting change request e 3 40 Offset gain setting mode 3 59 Offset gain setting mode flag eceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 37 Online module Chang cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 7 1 Open parametels ceceecececeeeeeeeeeeteeseeaeees 5 12 Operating condition setting 5 18 Operating conditi
184. er to Section 3 3 2 The setting range is 32768 to 32767 Make four kinds of settings process alarm upper upper limit value upper lower limit value lower upper limit value and lower lower limit value Refer to Section 3 2 4 for details of the process alarm 1 If a value outside the above setting range is set or if a value that does not satisfy the condition of lower lower limit value lt lower upper limit value lt upper lower limit value lt upper upper limit value is set it results in an error An error code is stored into the Error code Un G19 the Error flag XF turns ON and operation is performed based on the setting before the error detection Since the default setting is 0 change the setting When Enable is set in the Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 always take into account the scaling conversion before setting values wo N SS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 67 3 4 19 CH process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 zZ e E lt Q L O wW a N BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 20 CHO rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 1 Seta period with which the varying rate of the digital output value will be checked on a channel basis 2 To valid
185. es 3 4 16 CHO scaling value storage area Un G54 to Un G61 1 Digital output values after scaling are stored for respective channels 2 Scaling values are stored as 16 bit signed binaries b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G54 to Un G61 y Bit data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive 3 4 17 CHO scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G77 1 For each channel set a scaling range 2 To validate the setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 The setting range is 32000 to 32000 4 Refer to Section 3 2 6 for details of the scaling function Point 1 Setting a value outside the above setting range or a value that does not meet the inequality Upper limit gt Lower limit will cause an error If this occurs an error code is stored in Error code Un G19 followed by ON of the Error flag XF and the module will operate under the setting before the error 2 Since the default setting is 0 change the setting 3 When the Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 is set to Disable scaling upper lower limit values are ignored 3 4 18 CHO conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter Un G78 to Un G83 Q66AD DG only 1 This area is used to set the time necessary from when the used 2 wire transmitter powers on until its output stabilizes on a
186. es 1 to 5 and are set using 16 bit data When the intelligent function module switches are not set the default value for switches 1 to 5 is 0 Table4 1 Switch setting item Switch No Setting item Q68AD G z Input range Analog input range g setting value 4 to 20mA Input range setting 0 to 20mA J l CH1 to CH4 en R Switch 1 1 to 5V 2H H 0 to 5V 3H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH 10 to 10V 4H 0 to 10V 5H 4 to 20mA Extended mode AH 1 to 5V Extended mode BH User range setting FH Q66AD DG RENG Analog input range setting value 4 to 20mA For 2 wire transmitter input Input range setting 4 to 20mA For current input 6H CH9 eee 0 to 20mA For current input 7H Switch 2 H 4 to 20mA Extennded mode CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 For 2 wire transmitter input 4 to 20mA Extended mode For current input User range setting For current input Fixed at OOH for Q66AD DG User range setting For 2 wire transmitter input Switch 3 Empty OOL gt Sy toon Fixed Switch 4 OH Normal resolution mode 1H to FH value other than 0H 1 High resolution mode OH Normal mode A D conversion processing 1H to FH value other than OH Offset gain setting mode Switch 5 OH Fixed 4 Setting any value within the setting range will provide the same operation When the setting range is 1H to FH set 1H for example 4
187. etection period CH3 rate alarm upper limit value CH3 rate alarm lower limit value CH1 input signal error detection setting value Write to buffer memory Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 Turns OFF operation condition setting request Y9 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries Digital output value read processing X21 x120 X125 y129 Concurrently reads the A D 1 1 1 AF KO gt conversion completed flag and CH1 to CH3 digital output values M300 M301 D10 0 7 a Ww 1 E mov 11 D1 J Read the CH1 digital output value gt D10 1 J W HON Ble D2 J Read the CH2 digital output value 5 D10 2 og mov D13 D3 7 Read the CH3 digital T output value KO z Rewer v1 K2 K1 H2 K10 D10 K4 M300 1 z Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence O SM400 le rener oi Ra KL Ha K350 D6 Re m320 J Read the warning output flag lt M320 M321 D6 2 _ Processing at CH2 process ava ty Processing at warning occurrence alarm upper limit value O warning occurrence pa E bee Processing at CH2 process os i Processing at warning occurrence alarm lower limit value gt O EN warning occurrence g e Pocessig at warning occurrence Ae atlas D7 5 warning occurrence Processing at warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate Input signal error
188. eted flag YE Use prohibited w 5 XF Error flag YF Error clear request S E Zz ae EXa Point pee These signals cannot be used by the user since they are for system use only z If these are turned ON OFF by the sequence program the performance 2 oe of the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed 9 W E gt Qa S LW z9 z zapa oO 9 z a N W a Y 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 33 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 7 List of I O signal Q66AD DG MELSEC TA eries Signal direction CPU Module lt Q66AD DG Device No pul X0 Signal direction CPU Module Q66AD DG o Output YO Module ready x1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 ie a4 Y3 X4 Use prohibited v4 ties prohibited X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X7 High resolution mode status flag Wis X8 Warning output signal Y8 X9 Operating condition setting completed flag YAS Operating condition setting request XA Offset gain setting mode flag YA User range writing request XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request Input signal error detection signal XC YC Offset gain change request Offset gain change completed flag XD Maximum value minimum value reset YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag request XE A D conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited XF Error flag YF Error clear request
189. ext a flowchart of procedures 1 to 4 is shown below 1 GX Configurator AD Set up the initial setting auto refresh setting Refer to sections 5 4 and 5 5 2 Convert the parameter into FB Refer to sections 5 7 3 GX Developer Paste the FB to a sequence program Refer to sections 5 8 2 v 4 Convert compile the sequence program Refer to sections 5 8 3 End 5 30 5 8 Usage of FB 5 8 1 Outline 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries Point The initial setting auto refresh setting of the intelligent function module can be a performed by each of the following methods i 1 Set intelligent function parameters Initial setting Auto refresh setting and write them to the programmable controller CPU 2 Create an FB of the intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto 3 refresh setting and paste it to the sequence program 2 In accordance with the specification of the system perform the initial setting auto a refresh setting of the intelligent function module by one of the methods ii above gt 6 1 The following explains the case in which both of 1 and 2 are performed a Initial setting 2 FB setting given in 2 is valid b Auto refresh setting E Both 1 and 2 are valid a At the time of FB execution and in the END processing of the sequence program auto refresh is performed
190. figurator AD MELSEC TE eries 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format lu End setup Saves the set data and ends the operation 3 Cancel Cancels the setting and ends the operation 7 O Ee 2 Point Be Auto refresh setting data are stored in intelligent function module parameters ao After being written to the CPU module the auto refresh setting data are made effective by operating either 1 or 2 1 Change the RUN STOP switch of the CPU module STOP RUN STOP Z RUN z 2 After setting the RUN STOP switch to RUN power the programmable control i ler OFF ON or reset the CPU module a The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from sequence programs However processing equivalent to auto refresh can be added using the FROM Z TO instruction in the sequence program z n Te E 390 ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 5 Auto Refresh Setting 5 17 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 1 Monitor test screen Purpose Buffer memory monitoring testing I O signal monitoring testing operating condition setting offset gain settings Refer to Section 5 6 2 and pass data Refer to Section 5 6 3 5 6 4 are started from this screen Operating procedure Select monit
191. fset gain values can be monitored and set Generates FB automatically from the intelligent function module parameter Monitor Test Section 5 6 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE FB conversion Section 5 7 initial setting auto refresh setting TROUBLESHOOTING 5 1 Utility Package Functions 5 1 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE cries 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 5 2 1 For how to install or uninstall the utility package refer to Method of installing the MEL SOFT Series included in the utility package Handling precautions The following explains the precautions on using the GX Configurator AD 1 For safety 2 3 4 5 Since GX Configurator AD is add in software for GX Developer read Safety Precau tions and the basic operating procedures in the GX Developer Operating Manual About installation GX Configurator AD is add in software for GX Developer Version 4 or later Therefore GX Configurator AD must be installed on the personal computer that has already GX Developer Version 4 or later installed Screen error of Intelligent function module utility Insufficient system resource may cause the screen to be displayed inappropriately while using the Intelligent function module utility If this occurs close the Intelligent function module utility GX Developer program comments etc and other applications and then start GX De
192. fset specification 0 R W fe i i i a Section 3 4 8 a 17H 23 Offset gain setting mode gain specification 0 R W amp 18H 24 Averaging process specification CH1 to CH4 0 RIW 2 a Section 3 4 9 19H 25 Averaging process specification CH5 to CH6 0 RIW 2 W 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled gt R Read enabled g W Write enabled Mfo 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write Z Z condition of the following I O signals 5 5 Buffer memory writing condition Y9 x9 H mov x H Writing Operating Operating i Z request condition condition 5 setting seine fo request completed I a lag n a fe v4 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 49 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 50 Table3 9 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG 2 5 M ELSEG seres 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment Address Description Default R W Reference ipti u Hexadecimal Decimal i 1AH 26 to to System area 1DH 29 1Ey 30 CH1 Maximum value 0 R W 1FH 31 CH1 Minimum value 0 R W 20H 32 CH2 Maximum value 0 R W 21H 33 CH2 Minimum value 0 R W 22H 34 CH3 Maximum value 0 R W 23H 35 CH3 Minimum value 0 R W Section 3 4 10 24H 36 CH4 Maximum value 0 R W 25H 37 CH4 Minimum v
193. function module parameters can be read from and written into a programmable controller after having been saved in a file g b Seta target programmable controller CPU in GX Developer 26 Online Transfer setup 3 Checking the required utility While the start I O is displayed on the Intelligent function module utility setting 4 screen may be displayed for the model name 5 This means that the required utility has not been installed or the utility cannot be started from GX Developer D Check the required utility selecting Tools Intelligent function utility Utility z list in GX Developer 2 g gi ooo ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 13 5 3 3 Starting the intelligent function module utility 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD 5 4 5 14 MELSEC TE cries Initial Setting Purpose The following A D initial setting parameters are set A D conversion enable disable setting Averaging process specification Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings A D conversion starting time setting Q66AD DG Warning output settings Process alarm setting Process alarm upper upper limit value upper lower limit value lower upper limit value lower lower limit value Warning output settings Rate alarm setting Rate alarm upper
194. g MELSOFT series GX Developer 286 a We 5900 s FOL UI Online module change completed al Ae we 0 Se 90 Fo i fr 72 EG EO EXG Dale oO Z Fa o O x A w 5 a ie Ww z m z e W 1 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 30 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE T 31 MELSEC TA eries 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is unavailable 1 Conversion disable a Set the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channel conversion disable and turn operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON to stop conversion After confirming that conversion has stopped with the A D conversion completion flag Un G10 turn off Operation Condition Setting Request Y9 Device test Bit device Device Y9 X Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF _ Toggle force Word device buffer memory C Device z Buffer memory Module start vofoooo Hex Address o x DEC Setting value FF HEX 16 bitinteger gt Set Program Label reference program MAIN X Execution history Device Setting condition v Force ON Module start 0 Address 0 D FF H Y9 Force OFF The screen shows the setting example of the Q68AD G 7 3 Online Module Change P
195. g offset gain Setting ce eeeeceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeneneeeeeeeea 4 22 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD 5 1 to 5 33 Sli Utility Package FUNCHONS eneeier nenie a che led sbgccend odes A celle Dh rete cteatled ce ceetelebeudeneneeemetieetd 5 1 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package eee eceeeeee eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeteenaees 5 2 5 2 1 Handling precautions onaniaa a eieaa a aaa Ha snedadees EA Manedad ach isedets evar EEA 5 2 A 8 5 2 2 Operating environment seriinin n na a EA eerie TEA AA nent wtitliedane 5 4 53 Utility Package Operati n esineen aiiai ia aaa iiaiai iii aia a 5 6 5 3 1 Common utility package operations eeeeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeee eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeesenaaes 5 6 5 3 2 Operation Overviewiisi s Adee second eet ated einige esis cae ete cea hae E nates 5 9 5 3 3 Starting the intelligent function module Utility 2 2 eee eee eeteeee eee eetee eee eetaaeeeeeeeteeeeeeeene 5 11 Se otal SOU Gs esse cesses ec deed Sete tevee cede cone uc cee Andes A A aval EAT A an AAEE a AA EA 5 14 9 0 Auto Reres h Soti rr ia ents T A AA E A O oc thts 5 16 560 Monitoning Testem niie era iaeiiai a aE Tea E aii AA 5 18 5 6 1 Monitor test Screen wis eoriet iindern iac eeyan ra Aii ii EEA 5 18 5 6 2 Offset gain setting OPCration cccceeceeeeeeteeeee ee eecneee eee tiieee sere tineeeeeeeteeeeeeeiaeeeeeeniaeeeenee 5 21 5 6 3 Confirmation of conver
196. g value and a gs Zz digital value caused by the conversion characteristic 5 Digital Analog F Analog Digital z O E 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 23 5 6 3 Confirmation of conversion characteristic 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series Analog value lt When converted to a digital value gt Enter an analog value to be converted to a digital value lt When converted to an analog value gt The analog value converted from a digital value is displayed Digital value lt When converted to a digital value gt The digital value corresponding to an entered analog value is displayed lt When converted to an analog value gt Enter a digital value to be converted to an analog value x Point 1 The following explains an offset value and a gain value a An offset value is an analog input value voltage or current that is con verted to 0 in digital output value b Again value is an analog input value voltage or current that is con verted to the following digital output value 400 Normal resolution mode 16000 12000 High resolution mode 2 Satisfy the conditions below when setting an offset value and a gain value Note that they are different from the I O characteristics of the A D converter module In case of the Q66AD DG the option for the analog range setting is Current only a When Voltage is selected for the analog range setting e Setting range of offset gain values 10
197. gain value System S 16 to System area S 19 S 20 CH1 user range settings offset value System S 21 CH1 user range settings gain value System S 22 CH2 user range settings offset value System S 23 CH2 user range settings gain value System S 24 CH3 user range settings offset value System S 25 CH3 user range settings gain value System S 26 CH4 user range settings offset value System S 27 CH4 user range settings gain value System S 28 CH5 user range settings offset value System S 29 CH5 user range settings gain value System S 30 CH6 user range settings offset value System S 31 CH6 user range settings gain value System S 32 to System area _ 8 35 2 Setting is not necessary If setting is made the offset gain values will not be read properly Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices App 10 Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR APPENDIX 1 Functions MELSEC TA eries a Restores the offset gain values of the user range setting stored in the CPU to the A D converter module b There are two types of interlock signals for the G P OGSTOR instruction the completion device D and the status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G P OGSTOR
198. ge setting correct Check the Un G20 Un G21 in the monitor of GX Developer If the input range setting is incorrect redo the GX Developer intelligent function module switch setting Refer to Section 4 5 Is the A D conversion enable disable setting for the channel to be used set to A D conversion disabled Check the ON OFF status with Un GO in GX Developer monitor and review the initial setting of the sequence program or utility package Refer to Section 3 4 Is a large value set to the A D conversion starting time setting for the 2 wire transmitter Q66AD DG only Check the Un G78 to Un G83 in the monitor of GX Developer Has the operating condition setting request Y9 been executed From GX Developer turn the operating condition setting request Y9 from ON to OFF to check that the digital output values are stored into the Un G11 to Un G18 If so review the initial setting of the sequence program or utility package Refer to Section 3 3 Is the value set for the averaging processing specification correct In the case of current input are terminals V and connected For the Q68AD G only For the time averaging set a value of 4 times x 10 ms x No of channels or greater For the primary delay filter set a value of 10 ms x No of chan nels or greater If the above requirements are not met 0 is stored as a digital output value In the case of current input conn
199. ge specified 10V Approx 6666H 203 205 207 209 211 213 215 217 value Current specified 20mA Approx 3333H Description b For Q66AD DG Address Decimal 202 204 206 208 210 212 Approx OH Approx 6666H 205 207 209 211 213 Industrial shipment settings gain value Approx 3333H 2 Reference table for user range settings offset gain values Un G218 to 233 a For Q68AD G Offset gain value Reference value Hexadecimal Reference value Hexadecimal Approx OH Description Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 OV Approx OH 1V Approx 0A3DH Voltage 5V Approx 3333H 10V Approx 6666H OmA Approx OH Current 4mA Approx 0A3DH 20mA Approx 3333H b For Q66AD DG Offset gain value Reference value Hexadecimal OmA Approx OH 4mA Approx 10E5H 20mA Approx 547BH Example When the offset value of the Q68AD G channel 1 is 1V and its gain value is 5V the reference value of the CH1 user range settings offset value Un G218 is approxi mately OA3Du and the reference value of the CH1 user range settings gain value Un G220 is approximately 33331 7 37 7 4 Range Reference Table T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 7 5 Precautions for Online Module Change The following are the precautions for online module change z W gt 1 Always perform a
200. ging processing z 50 W A a Wo 1 Time averaging 23 A D conversion is averaged in terms of time on a channel basis and a digital oom average value is output 2 Count averaging A D conversion is averaged in terms of count on a channel basis and a digital average value is output 3 Move averaging The specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time are averaged GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD c Primary delay filter A digital output value is smoothed according to the preset time constant 1 Refer to Section 3 2 1 for the details of the A D conversion system PROGRAMMING 9 Input signal error detection function The voltage current outside the setting range is detected 10 Warning output There are the following two warning outputs a Process alarm A warning is output if a digital output value falls outside the setting range ONLINE MODULE CHANGE b Rate alarm A warning is output if the varying rate of a digital output value falls outside the preset varying rate range 1 Refer to Section 3 2 4 for details on warning output TROUBLESHOOTING 1 1 Features 1 2 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 11 Scaling function A D conversion values can be converted to percentage values in the preset range and be loaded into the buffer memory This function can reduce the time required for programming Refer to Section 3 2 6 12 Online module change Furthermore the follo
201. glish version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version SP1 or later Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version SP1 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System English version 4 Install the GX Configurator AD in GX Developer Version 4 or higher in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator AD Japanese version cannot be used in combination and GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator AD English version cannot be used in combination GX Configurator AD
202. h sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA eries c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor Installed status Base 2 4 Base Module MastePLc gt Main base c Unmo Unmo Unmo u unti unti unti a ng ng ng c Q25PHCPU aj g a la Parameter status Mode E p iO Address 20 30 System monitor 0 2 3 Online module change Powe None None rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16pt 16pt Status Module system error B Module error H Detailed inf of power supply Module change d Enable the conversion of the channel to be used in A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Monitor CH O digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion is processed normally e Since the new module is in a default status it must be initialized by a sequence program after control resumption Before performing initialization check whether the contents of the initialization program are correct or not 1 Normal system configuration The sequence program should perform initialization on the leading edge of Module READY X9 of the A D converter module When control resumption is executed Module READY X0 turns ON and initialization is performed If the sequence program performs initializ
203. hange cae YB niet 2 Refer to the XB column for ON OFF timing Refer to Section 4 6 for offset gain settings Offset gain 1 Turn this signal ON when changing the offset gain value YC 4 2 Refer to the field of XC for the ON OFF timing change request Refer to Section 4 6 for the offset gain setting Maximum value 1 Turning ON the Maximum value minimum value reset request YD clears the maximum value YD minimum value minimum value stored at any of the buffer memory addresses 30 to 45 Un G30 to Un G45 reset request 2 Refer to the XD column for ON OFF timing YF Error clear 1 Turn this signal ON when clearing a write error or input signal error request 2 Refer to the field of XF or XC for the ON OFF timing 1 Q66AD DG only 3 40 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Point When the User range writing request YA is turned ON in the normal mode with a A D conversion enabled the A D converter module restores the user range i Offset gain setting mode flag XA am yl n User range writing request YA z During restoration Restoration ke User range restoration processing completed a ae A D conversion completed flag E 2 Un G10 i AS Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Power ON Power ON Power of 2 wire transmitter Power OFF Ieee 2 z E l
204. he following conditions the operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns OFF When operating condition setting request Y9 is ON gt Performed by the A D converter module Performed by the sequence program Module ready X0 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 Operating condition setting request Y9 A D conversion completed flag XE 3 Digital outputs are cleared immediately after this Operating condition setting request Y9 turns ON Therefore turn ON the A D conversion completed flag before reading digital outputs 1 For the Q66AD DG only 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Device No Signal Name Description In offset gain setting mode 1 This signal is used as an interlock condition to turn ON OFF the User range writing request YA when the value at completion of offset gain setting adjustment is registered i 2 Refer to Section 4 6 regarding the offset gain settings O gt Performed by the A D converter module gt Performed by the sequence program Module ready XO ORF z Offset gain setting mode flag XA a ae ad 2S DO Offset gain User range writing request YA XA setting mode flag In normal mode 1 This signal is us
205. he following error screen appears the user range cannot be saved 3 Click the OK button dismount the module as is and perform the operation in 5 W Section 7 3 4 2 c and later 5 MELSOFT series GX Developer zm The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation o 3 pe S 30 lt a a a PO imi Pee c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the connector and dismount the module Point E r kare Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the Ez module being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED HS r B oO will not be lit BES 0 zZ Fa 0 O x A w 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 16 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 3 Mounting of new module a Mount the dismounted module and new module to the other system b Using the G P OGLOAD instruction save the user set values to the CPU device Refer to Appendix 1 2 for the G P OGLOAD instruction c Using the G P OGSTOR instruction restore the user set values to the module Refer to Appendix 1 3 for the G P OGSTOR instruction d Dismount the new module from the other system mount it to the slot from whe
206. iene actus toed vad tues cased utdveeed etinda diva dytacs ouehieae i tteer eaten cakes 3 33 3 3 2 Details of l O SighalS ai i ec8 waiitien aise ee ee A Rest ii ates 3 35 3 4 Buffer Memory 2 200 cc vies iura viele eee ete eta id alee ade 3 42 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment naserie r iad ai e a niai iaa 3 42 3 4 2 A D conversion enable disable setting UN GO ce eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee enteeee eee taaeeeeeetaeeeereeea 3 54 3 4 3 CH average time average number of times moving average time constant settings WANG 1 to UNG 8 auiii eni aeiia eae Ai diet en Pea NESE AENT PEL A EEEE 3 55 3 4 4 A D conversion completed flag UNn G10 sssesesseeseressesrrsseetrrsstirrrssterrrsstternsssttnnnssrtnnnat 3 56 3 4 5 CH digital output value UN G11 to UM G18 oer eee ennae eee eeeaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeenaes 3 57 3 4 6 Write data error Code UMG19 eee eeeneeeeeeeenee eee aE EE ANERER EERI TEA AREE ENERE EEEE a 3 58 3 4 7 Setting range UM G20 UMN G21 a ceeeeee eee eeeee cette eeeeeee eee seaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeaeeees 3 58 3 4 8 Offset gain setting mode offset gain specification UMN G22 UN G23 eese 3 59 3 4 9 Averaging process specification Un G24 UM G25 eee ee eetteee eee teeee eee tneeeeeeetnee 3 60 3 4 10 CH maximum value minimum value storage area Un G30 to Un G45 00 ee 3 61 3 4 11 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting Un G47 3 61 3 4 12 War
207. ignal error detection x 1000 upper limit setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range b Input signal error detection lower limit value This value is calculated as follows Lower limit value of the input range Full input range Gain value Offset value x Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection lower limit setting value A value equal to or smaller than the lower limit value of the input range can be set A setting value can be calculated by the following formula Input signal error detection Lower limit value ofeach _ Input signal error detection PR wate deci _ range lower limit value x 1000 Input signallerror detection isainvalua oP each range Offset value of each range lower limit setting value 3 2 Function List 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Remark RR eee eee eee eee eee eee eee s i Ei rt The following table lists the lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range D Table3 4 The lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range Q68AD G Input Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value Gain value 0 to 10V ov 10V 5 0 to 5V ov 5V E 1to 5V 1V 5V a Volt 1 to 5V extended mode 1V 5V 2 O i age 10 to 10V 10V ov 10V 5 Z Analog value when the digital value is D O A Analog value set as an An
208. in value Offset value gt 5 5mA 2 High resolution mode Gain value Offset value 16 0mA 4 When an analog value that exceeds the range of the digital output value is 2 z E lt Q L O wW a N Zz ici PER O entered the digital output value will be fixed at the maximum or minimum 5 N value ora ae Digital output value Digital output value Analog input 3 F d 2 9 is 5 3 5 4 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode FOL range setting al Ae 4 to 20mA 96 4095 288 12287 0 to 20mA f0 4 to 20MA ok 1096 4595 3288 13787 Extended mode 3 User range setting 4096 4095 12288 12287 x i E8 EX D24 o zZ lt L id fe A W E gt a S LW z9 i zapa OO zZ fe E N W a fe ad 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 9 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS Digital output value Digital output value 3 10 2 Input characteristic of Q66AD DG Fig 3 3 shows a graph of the Q66AD DG input characteristic 1 4 to 20mA Practical analog input range 1 High resolution mode 2287 kenen r 12000 F mna M m m Taras pasmane l l l l I Normal resolution 1 mode l 1 4095 t f te wee ees MO SSS SSeS SS SS Se SS SSS 1 I l l 0 0 l ee Pe Loose Saas ee eee ee 2 l l l l l l l l l l l 1 l l l I I l l I 1 1 l I I L L 04 20 Analog input cur
209. ine module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer The online module change mode is stopped W Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again 7 7 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor WW Installed status Base a a Base Module Ww MasterPLC gt Main base 5 Powe Unmo Unmo Unmo tsu unti funti unti pply ng ng jng Q25PHCPU Zz O Z 0 E pZ Parameter status Mode 2 Tt Address 20 30 40 en System moritor nO 2 3 4 Online module change Powe None None None rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 2 Zz O Status BB Module system error E Module error E Module waming Detailed inf of power supply S Module change J Close 5 wW g 2 d Monitor CH O digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion is processed normally z ne Monitor Test a A Hl Z20 Module information xt a Ww Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 s 8 x EOL z i W W Modul
210. ing If during the offset gain setting the A D conversion values are stored into Un G11 to Un G18 as in the normal mode 1 Q68AD G The A D conversion values of all channels are stored into the buffer memory 2 Q66AD DG The A D conversion values of the channels specified in the offset gain setting mode Un G22 Un G23 are stored into the buffer memory 4 22 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 6 3 A D conversion value storage during offset gain setting 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD 5 1 Utility Package Functions OVERVIEW Table 5 1 shows an overview of the utility package functions Table5 1 Utility package GX Configurator AD function list Item Description Reference section 1 Sets the following items that require initial setting A D conversion enable disable setting Averaging process specification CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Conversion starting time setting For 2 wire transmitter Q66AD DG Warning output settings Process alarm setting Process alarm upper upper limit value upper lower limit value lower upper limit value lower lower limit value SPECIFICATIONS Warning output settings Rate alarm setting Rate alarm upper limit value lower limit value Initial setting Rate alarm warning detection period Section 5 4 Input signal error dete
211. ing settings etc turn ON the channel change request YB 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries Point 1 Perform the offset gain settings in the range that satisfies the conditions specified in POINT of Section 3 1 2 2 When the setting exceeds this range the maximum resolution or total accuracy may not be within the range indicated in the performance specification 2 Though the offset gain settings can be performed on multiple channels at the same time set the offset and gain separately 0 at either of the buffer memory addresses 22 23 If channels are set at Un G22 and Un G23 at the same time an error will occur and the ERR LED will be lit 3 After the offset gain settings are completed verify that the offset and gain values have been set correctly under actual usage conditions 4 The offset and gain values are stored into the Flash memory and are not erased at power off 5 At the time of offset gain setting turn ON the user range write request YA to write the values to the Flash memory Data can be written to the Flash memory up to 100 thousand times To prevent accidental write to the Flash memory an error will occur and the error code Un G19 will be stored if write is performed 26 consecutive times OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 6 If an error error code 400 1 occurs dur
212. ing of new module a Mount a new module to the same slot and install the connector b After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H Module name Q68AD G Installation confirmation Status Module control restart R Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel 4 Oeration check a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control resumption Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address 000H Module name Q684D G Module change execution Installation confirmation EE Status Module control restart 3 7 y Change module installation completion r Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute MELSOFT series GX Developer i The online module change mode is stopped YD Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again Ts 23 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made wi
213. ing offset gain setting re set the correct offset gain value The offset gain value of the channel where the error has occurred is not z O lt aw W Q fo W a O L m a n Ww a 2 lt A n W Q fe a o written to the A D converter module 7 O indicates the corresponding channel number we qT 7 When the offset gain setting mode is switched to the normal mode the 5 module ready X0 turns from OFF to ON a Note that the initial setting processing will be executed at this time if there is a ES sequence program that performs initial settings when the module ready X0 592 turns ON 8 When one mode is switched to the other the normal mode is switched to the offset gain setting mode or the offset gain setting mode is switched to the g normal mode A D conversion is suspended and power supply to the 2 wire Z lt transmitter is turned OFF g To resume A D conversion and power supply to the 2 wire transmitter turn g ON the operating condition setting request Y9 after the mode is switched to the normal mode 9 Un G202 to Un G225 are the areas used to restore the User set offset gain w values when online module change is made a Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change y zz Ze OO 0 Z E O O E i a O E 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 19 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION M ELSEG Q series 2 Program examples The prog
214. instruction was executed consecu Execute the G P OGSTOR instruction only once for E tively one module At the time of offset gain setting a set value was written At the time of offset gain setting write a set value only to the E7PROM 26 or more times once at one time The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed for the model j Execute the G P OGLOAD and G P OGSTOR instruc 163 that differs from the model for which the G P OGLOAD instruction had been executed 8 1 Error Code List tions for the same model 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC KE eries Table 8 1 Error code list 2 3 E d E s Error description Processing decimal z The averaging time set in Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of Reset theraveraging time setting to within 40 to 5 5000ms u 200 40 to 5000ms 5 Also the set value must be 4 x 10 x No of O indicates the channel number set incorrectly se channels used or greater The averaging count set in Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 3 i Reset the averaging count setting to within 4 to B 300 4 to 500 times S 500 times z O indicates the channel number set incorrectly O 8 The moving average count set in Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the 7 Reset the moving average count setting to within 2 u 310 range of 2 to 60 times Rit a to 60 times gt q O indicates the channel number set incorrectly nw The time constant for the primary
215. ion module parameter setting module select screen 6 15 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 3 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 3 Programming example a Read digital output values X120 X12E Y129 u mov w D1 Read the CH1 digital output value Mov w D2 J Read the CH2 digital output value Read the CH3 digital z woy i Ds J output value 2 Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence SM400 F uov W6 kmo F Read the warning 3 output flag Process alarm i e Hz MoV wW K4M30 7 Read the warning 2 2 output flag Rate alarm n M12 P i t CH2 IN Processing at warning occurrence alaen Goer imi ae S M13 warning occurrence a i E SA at warning occurrence e I S o M34 warning occurrence 0 m i a ASS at warning occurrence Pepe a lt M35 warning occurrence L A Processing at CH3 rate O i apap eC Processing at warning occurrence alarm lower limit valie g Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection warning occurrence n SM400 r Read the input signal p lt umm m W 1 Kaso J error detection flag M50 F Processing at CH1 input 5 ht Processing at error detection J signal error detection X22 X120 W g ht SET Y12F Turn ON the error clear request Y12F aw m ZS Error code display and reset processing i A fiz x2
216. is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module MasterPLC gt Main base Powe rsu pply Q25PHCPU Unmoj unti ng Parameter status EEA rt Address Q25PHCPU Powe rsu pply Status Module system error Hi Module change Module error Oo Module warning 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system Zoe seanss if CE CE C CE CE C Ex Mode C System monitor Online module change Detailed inf of power supply Close T 18 SYSTEM SETUP AND PROCEDURES UTILITY PACKAGE w 5 a ie Ww z z e W 0 Zz lt x oO GX CONFIGURATOR AD OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA series d Monitor CH D digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion is processed normally Monitor Test 5 Resumption of control a After choosing Diag
217. itial setting auto refresh setting Operating procedure Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Module Selection Screen lt lt FB Support Parameter gt gt FB conversion Setting screen FB conversion FB program is generated from the following contents Start 1 0 Module model li Auto No name tefresh_ FB Program name 0000H Q684D G Explanation of items 1 Items displayed on the screen Start I O No The start I O No of the information which is set up on the currently open intelligent function module parameter is displayed Module model name The module model name of the information which is set up on the currently open intelligent function module parameter is displayed Initial setting Set up whether to apply FB conversion to the parameter or not Check if you apply FB conversion to the parameter Auto refresh Set up whether to apply FB conversion to the parameter or not Check if you apply FB conversion to the parameter FB program name Set up the name of the converted FB program Up to six single byte characters can be set up as an FB program name However the characters and terms shown below cannot be set up as FB program name Character 7 lt gt h Term COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX PRN CON NUL CLOCK In addition l is added for initial setting and A is added for auto refresh setting respectively to the top of
218. l error detection upper and lower limit values are as follows Input signal error detection upper limit value 18 18 5 x 150 1000 19 95mA Input signal error detection lower limit value 8 18 5 x 150 1000 9 95mA 5 Refer to Section 3 2 3 for details of the input signal error detection function 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 71 3 4 22 CH input signal error detection setting value CH Input signal error detection lower limit setting val OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 z o lt Q L O wW a N BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 72 E Point SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Set the input signal error detection upper limit value to less than 25mA If the setting is 25mA or more the error may not be detected 2 Ifa value outside the setting range is set an error occurs and an error code is stored in the Error code Un G19 In this case the operation is performed based on the setting before the error detection 3 The following table lists the lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range Table3 10 The lower limit value offset value and gain value for each input range Q68AD G Input Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value Gain value 0 to 10V ov 10V 0 to 5V ov 5V 1 to 5V 1V 5V Volt 1 to 5V extended mode 1V
219. le CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling CH1 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Average time 40 5000ms Average number of times 4 500times Move average 2 60times Linear delay filter 10 5000ms CH1 Warming output setting Process alarm setting Disable Details Select input Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup Cancel b Auto refresh setting Refer to Section 5 5 Set the digital output values warning output flags input signal error detection flags and error codes of CH1 to CH3 Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0020 Module model name Q68AD G Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer word count PLC side Transfer z Device direction CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value 1 gt Jwi 1 gt gt 1 gt CH5 Digital output value 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt CHE Digital output value CH7 Digital output value CH8 Digital output value CH1 Maximum value Make text file End setup c Writing the intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 5 3 3 The intelligent function module parameters are written to the remote I O station This operation is performed using the intelligent funct
220. led status ase an S MasterPLC gt E 2 Main base K Unmoj Unmo Unmo unti junti funti ng jng jng y Q25PHCPU Parameter status Mode E p ira Address 10 20 30 System monitor ofif2z 3 Online module change Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs Powe Intelli None None None 3 5 rsu G25PHCPU gent Diagnostics pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Module s Detailed Information Base Information Product Inf List Status Module system error B Module error Oo Module warming Detailed inf of power supply i Module change Stop monitor ae TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 26 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series b Click the Execution button to enable a module change Online module change Operation Target module C Module change execution 1 0 address 000H as Module name Q684D G Installation confirmation r Status Module control restart F Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel If the following error screen appears the user range cannot be saved
221. line T Network range assignment 20 M station gt A station M station lt A station a StationNo it a x x Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Stat _ End 256 0100 DIFF 256 0000 OOFF 256 0100 DIFF 256 0o00 OOFF v Ea O M station lt R station 5 StationN TEE E eee w o i O W D Refresh parameters z Dev name Points Stat End 2 Transfer SB SB lt Transfer SW Gm Random cyclic ar S Random cyclic 2 a wW Transferi ao Woe Transfer2 2 5 2 Transfer3 a Ee a Transfer4 Transfer5 Transfer6 i a we SE Q0 ak Zz EG Eo ayn 582 e oO z q E Oo ie ina a W a S LW Lu Ze oz CS a OO 0 zZ H O O E N W a a O ae ke 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 14 6 3 1 Programming example using the utility package 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY eries 2 Operating the utility package Operate the utility package on the remote I O station side Set the following in the Intelligent function module parameter setting module select area e Start I O No 20 e Module type A D Conversion Module Module model name Q68AD G a Initial setting Refer to Section 5 4 Set the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 Refer to Section 6 3 for the settings CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0020 Module model name Q684D G Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enab
222. line module change e Operation Target module lt Module change execution 1 0 address oooH F 3 Ne Module name Q684D G EE Installation confirmation nz zO Status nO Module control restart Changing module Status Guidance no The module can be exchanged 5 Please press the Execute button after installing a new module E S L O W Q N Cancel Zz O 4 Operation check id gi aa Ww a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control oo resumption fe oom Online module change 5 Operation Target module i S 1 0 add O00H 9 S Module change execution aaaress 5 E eS Module name Q684D G g oO Installation confirmation a m gt Module control restart Staue B 8 2 Change module installation completion xz 582 Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute 9 3 o O x A b Click the OK button to leave the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer The online module change mode is stopped J Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled W l m e Wu Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again zZ z e W 1 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 34 7 3 6 When u
223. llowing functions is attempted this product may not operate m normally e Start of application in Windows compatible mode Z e Fast user switching lt e Remote desktop a An 22 e Large fonts Details setting of Display Properties Eau 590 Also GX Configurator AD is not supported by 64 bit Windows XP and 64 par bit Windows Vista 2 Auser with USER authority or higher can access GX Configurator AD for Windows Vista and Windows 7 3 When Windows 7 is used the following functions are not available e Windows XP Mode e Windows Touch ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 5 5 5 2 2 Operating environment 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 3 1 Common utility package operations 1 Control keys Special keys that can be used for operation of the utility package and their applica tions are shown in the table below Key Application Cancels the current entry in a cell LEsc Closes the window Tab Moves between controls in the window Used in combination with the mouse operation to select multiple Ctrl cells for test execution Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned Delete When a cell is selected clears all of the set
224. lname Q68AD G Module model name Q68AD G Setting tem Curent value Setting value Setting tem Current value Setting value X00 Module ready ON Ready X07 High resolution mode status flag OFF Normal resolution mode XO8 Warning output signal OFF No Warning X09 Operating condition setting completed flag ON No request CH4 Maximum value CH4 Minimum value CH5 Maximum value CH5 Minimum value CHE Maximum value CHE Minimum value CH7 Maximum value CH7 Minimum value CH8 Maximum value XOE A D conversion completed flag ON Completed CH8 Minimum value X0F E rror flag OFF No error Ed Maximum value minimum value reset request X0A Offset gain setting mode flag OFF Normal mode XOB Channel change completed flag OFF No request XOC Input signal error detection signal OFF No Input Signal Enor Rou value minimum value reset completed OFF Release ed ed edd ed ed edd ted Release X Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Current value Monitoring Flash ROM setting Details Current value display display Cannot execute test Cannot execute test Make text file Make text fle Stop monitor Stop monitor 5 18 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 1 Monitor test screen 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M IES 26 Fel ceries
225. m gt elon e CMe CHANGE 8 1 Error Code List 8 2 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 8 1 Error code list 3 3 Error code 3 Error description decimal are set contradictorily Liindicates the channel number set incorrectly 6A ial Aindicates the following state The process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 2 Lower lower limit value gt lower upper limit value 3 Lower upper limit value gt upper lower limit value 4 Upper lower limit value gt upper upper limit value MELSEC TE eries Processing Reset the contents of the process alarm upper lower limit values Un G86 to Un G117 700 outside the range of 10 to 5000ms O indicates the channel number set incorrectly not ng A multiple of the sampling cycle or O indicates the channel number set incorrectly period O indicates the channel number set incorrectly The rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 is The rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 is A multiple of the time or count averaging conversion cycle When the time or count averaging setting in Un G1 to Un G8 is changed the rate alarm warning detection period is not a multiple 720 of the corresponding new time or count averaging conversion Reset the rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 to within 10 to 5000ms Change the value of the rate alarm warning detec tion period as follows e For sam
226. mation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel If the following error screen appears click the OK button dismount the module as is and mount a new module MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation c After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the connector and dismount the module Point Always dismount the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being dismounted the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries 3 Mounting of new module m a Mount a new module to the same slot and install the connector gt W gt b After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the fe RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF Online module change 5 Operation Target module F Module change execution 1 0 address 000H 3 Installation confirmation Moe bere eee E L gt O Module control restart Tan p nO Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged E Please press the E
227. mode to normal mode method is given below ff Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Refer to Section 4 6 1 2 a 3 Setting made to mode switching setting buffer memory addresses 158 159 Un G158 S Un G159 and turning the operation condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON a E E an ulel delice ld locale A cate E dateades Refer to Section 4 6 1 2 b Z z Intelligent function module switch setting Refer to Section 4 5 Section 4 6 1 2 c 5 After intelligent function module switch setting reset the programmable controller CPU or switch power OFF then ON S 12 Do not perform the operations below during the steps indicated with 2 If they are performed the 5 data inside a flash memory will have a problem and the Q68AD G may not operate normally 2 Powering off the programmable controller CPU it Resetting the programmable controller CPU 2 ra 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 13 4 6 1 Offset gain settings Q68AD G 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TA cries Point 1 Perform the offset gain settings in the range that satisfies the conditions specified in POINT of Section 3 1 2 2 When the setting exceeds this range the maximum resolution or total accuracy may not be within the range indicated in the performance specification 2 Though the offset gain settings can be performed on multiple channels at the same time set the offset and gain separately 0 at either of
228. n YA OFF g O change completed flag XC is ON E Pere oe eee 4 Z x a Y Set the user range writing request S a Turn ON the offset gain change YA to OFF 594 request YC i 4 Verify that the offset gain setting Set the gain setting channel in mode status flag XA is ON buffer memory address 23 4 9 Un G23 Set buffer memory S address 22 Un G22 to 0 ERR LED lit 2 z r NO 5 Turn the channel change request x YB to ON 2 Switch to the normal setting mode Vv C End m E Q S w z9 a lt ZT OO 0 Z E O O I a w fan 2 O A He 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 17 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 18 1 2 MELSEC TE eries The mode switching normal mode to offset gain setting mode to normal mode method is given below Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN s e Refer to Section 4 6 2 2 a Setting made to mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning the operation condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON Refer to Section 4 6 2 2 b Intelligent function module switch setting Refer to Section 4 5 Section 4 6 2 2 c After intelligent function module switch setting reset the programmable controller CPU or switch power OFF then ON Turning ON the channel change request YB starts power supply from the corresponding chan nel to the 2 wire transmitter After fully checking the wir
229. n online module change in the correct procedure A failure to do so 2 can cause a malfunction or failure 2 If an online module change is made with the user range setting the accuracy after that will fall to about less than three times of the accuracy before that Re set the offset gain values as necessary g nz O 3 During an online module change do not perform the operations below If they are per 2 formed the A D converter module may not operate normally e Powering off the programmable controller CPU n e Resetting the programmable controller CPU z O O W D Zz g 26 a is ra Pow wo Ww oom We Og g5 G lt i z6 50 562 0 Zz L ug oO Oo a Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 5 Precautions for Online Module Change T 38 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 1 Error code decimal MELSEC TE eries The following section explains the types of errors that may occur when the A D converter module is used and how to troubleshoot such errors Error Code List If an error occurs in the A D converter module while writing to or reading data from the pro grammable controller CPU an error code is written to buffer memory address 19 Un G19 Table8 1 Table 8 1 Error code list 1 3 Error description The input range is set with an illegal value in the intelligent Set a correct parameter value in the parameter
230. n starting time has been set CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Conversion starting time A D conversion pre processing Approx 150 to 165ms A D conversion processing number of conversion enabled channels x 10ms Point Set the A D conversion starting time in consideration of the time necessary from when the 2 wire transmitter powers on until its output stabilizes and the warm up 2 Zz O lt o E S W a N Zz time of the 2 wire transmitter E gi Q 255 lt a a a Example When the time necessary from when the 2 wire transmitter powers on until its output stabilizes is 500ms 2 8 9 SEH A D conversion enable A D conversion enable disable setting Power supply to 2 wire transmitter ON OFF Un GO uP Power ON S s f When A D conversion starting time is Oms g 0 26V power supply to 2 wire transmitter A D conversion processing starts at this point e 5 592 Analog output of 2 wire transmitter When A D conversion starting time is 500ms A D conversion processing starts at this point 500ms A Approx 150 to 165ms ON a A D conversion gt e A D conversion gt oO A D conversion completed flag when A D Starting time pre processing Z conversion starting time is set to 500ms Un G10 10ms z A D conversion O Approx 150 to 165ms ON processing time 2 le A D conversion a A D conversion completed flag when A D pre processing conve
231. nction module setting switch 5 set to other than 0 8 2 3 When the ALM LED is on or flashing 1 When on Check item Corrective action Is a warning output being generated Check the warning output flag Un G50 Un G51 2 When flashing Check item Corrective action Is an input signal error being generated Check the input signal error detection flag Un G49 8 5 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 1 When the RUN LED is flashing or turned off 8 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 8 2 4 When the digital output values cannot be read Check item Is 24VDC external supply power being supplied Q66AD DG only Corrective action Check that the external supply power terminals between terminals No A19 and A20 or B19 and B20 are supplied with a 24VDC voltage Is there any fault with the analog signal lines such as disconnec tion for the Q66AD DG disconnection of the signal line with the 2 wire transmitter or wire break Check for faulty condition of the signal lines by a visual check and a continuity check Is the CPU module in the STOP status Set the CPU module to the RUN status Are the offset gain settings correct Verify that the offset gain settings are correct Refer to Section 4 6 and 5 6 2 If the user range is being used switch to a different default input range and check if A D conversion is correctly performed If so redo the offset gain settings Is the input ran
232. nesttnannnetananaanannanant 7 4 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GA CONMGUMALON A DY a ra E R A AAE TO 7 5 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with seg ence Programs rennan i ae a a a a a a aera a AA 7 10 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system is available soiree aa E a a A E 7 15 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system is Unavailable eee ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeene eee eeetaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeseeaas 7 20 7 3 5 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is available asien aE EEE Ea R 7 26 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system Is Unavallable jacini aae E E AE EEEREN EER 7 31 7 4 Range Reference Table cc cccccccscccecesdeencceeddevenceteddebenceeessuenseededeuensededddbsnseeeddebaneddedevenaededdebenene 7 37 7 5 Precautions for Online Module Change eessssseessssseesserresessnnneeerrnneeerinnnesenennueennnnanesttnnaaennnnneeenn 7 38 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 1to8 8 Sel Error Code hist ci c ic stswtiriiteiivet ce tienhis aleeitel a a e teenie ce Ante indie 8 1 8 2 TFOUDIESMOOUNG T rna toads cies T T EEE EA 8 5 8 2 1 When the RUN LED is flashing or turned Off
233. network module No of modules Main base unit of Extension base unit remote I O station of remote I O station z Q lt z Base unit 3 i zZ fe ce SYSTEM QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G Up to 64 5 QJ72LP25GE 2 QJ72BR15 O z Applicable x N A Q 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module g 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit BS Remark Sooo ooo coo oce oer E The Basic model QCPU or C Controller module cannot create the MELSECNET ot H remote I O network eris tow eeeseeeceeaoes eee eeeeeaeeeeeeseeaoe eee eeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeseeeaeaee ee TE mAn nom 2 Support of the multiple CPU system When using the A D converter in a multiple CPU system refer to the following manual first b3 e QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System 9 a Applicable A D converter module xa 2 The A D converter module is of the function version C from the first product and applicable to a multiple CPU system b Intelligent function module parameters g Write intelligent function module parameters to only the control CPU of the A D Z converter module amp O 3 Compatibility with online module change The A D converter module is of the function version C from the first product and online module change is possible w For the procedure of online module change refer to Chapter7 a z9 2 OO 0 zZ O O E if z O E 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 3
234. ng rate alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 2 e Rate alarm warning detection period 50ms e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 3 e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 1 e In the event of a write error an error code shall be displayed in BCD format The error code shall be reset after removal of the cause 6 21 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 6 4 1 Before creating a program i Perform the following steps before creating a program s W 1 Wiring of external devices Mount the Q68AD G on the base unit and connect the external devices e For all of CH1 to CH3 run the cables for current input z For details refer to 4 4 2 2 a For 2 wire transmitter input z o Le Q66AD D6 E DE RUN 23 ALME 2 O ERR CH1 external device Q ee 2 wire transmitter powers O Te CHT l CHK B2 z a B3 z CH2 external device Aa B4 oO CH3 Id Q external device a B7 D 2 wire transmitter powers 5 _ Pe a CH3 LEICA As B8 A 89 A10 810 z A11 811 a12 B12 oS A13 B13 ore i fae aF a A16 B16 BSE man aia wow 24V0C Al B17 oom External power suppl al A18 818 casno 05 E A19 819 ANo 20 820 5 5 a i Ox F aL E 2 ae 582 PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 4 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q66AD DG 6 22 6 4
235. ng oO O Count averaging 4 to 500 Moving average 2 to 60 secon Gain setting Primary delay fiter 10 to 5000ms CH1 2 rm CH2 w Ww CH1 Warning output setting Process alarm setting Disable nam CH1 Warning output flag process alarm CH3 lower imit value CHA Conversion CH1 Warning output flag process alam characteristic CHS Flash ROM setting CH6 s Current value Monitoring X splay CH O a Select input CH8 Make text fle Setting range lt q EES Enable a Disable 9 L i z Stop monitor Execute test Conve rsion fo characteristic o x lt 2 Conversion characteristic Analog Range setting Analog Current Range setting oO a z Offset Gain setting S Offset value md fe rr T 40 O Gain value md O 20 0 x zi oO Range settings Analog Digital conversion Analog gt Digital C Digital gt Analog W Analog value mA a Q Digital value 2u wo ZZ Conversion az OO 0 Z He O O x N W z a 2 O ra e 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 19 5 6 1 Monitor test screen 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD 5 20 Explanation of items 1 Items Setting item Current value Setting value MELSEC TE eries Displays I O signals and buffer memory names Monitors the I O signal states and present buffer memory values 2 Command buttons Current value display Select or enter the data to be written during test operation Displays the current value of the item selected
236. ning output settings UM G48 occ eect ence eee eeeaae eee eeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeenaeeeeeneeaas 3 63 3 4 13 Input signal error detection flag UM G49 oo cece eect eetne terete eaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaas 3 64 3 4 14 Warning output flag UM G50 UMN S1 00 e eee erne eee ee teat eee eeteaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 3 65 3 4 15 Scaling enable disable setting UM G53 oo cece eee eee eee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 3 65 3 4 16 CH scaling value storage area UN G54 to UM G61 ooo cece eee ee tenet eeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 3 66 3 4 17 CH scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to UM G77 2000 c cece eee eeetttteeeeeeeeeees 3 66 3 4 18 CH conversion starting time setting for 2 wire transmitter Un G78 to Un G83 Q6GAD DG iON shez decssese Uoptea shed caceaags ot cads vaten Gases T essa sdtee Geveatadecendatisadevta sateccenntee 3 66 3 4 19 CH process alarm upper lower limit value Un G86 to Un G117 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 67 3 4 20 CH rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to UN G 125 eee eeeteeeeeeeee 3 68 3 4 21 CH rate alarm upper lower limit value Un G126 to Un G141 0 eee eeeeeeeercteeeeeeeees 3 69 3 4 22 CH input signal error detection setting value CH Input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 CH Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 3 70 3 4 23 Mode switching setting U
237. nosis Online module change on GX Developer to redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change b The Online module change completed screen appears MELSOFT series GX Developer x i 7 19 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M eLS a6 Q series 7 3 4 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system is unavailable 1 Conversion disable OVERVIEW a On the Operating condition setting screen of GX Configurator AD set Disable in the Setting value field of CHO A D conversion enable disable setting and click the Execute test button CH1 Operating condition setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Module model name Q68AD G Setting item Current value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting CH1 Averaging process specification CH1 Average time Average number of times it Moving average Time constant settings Sampling 0 Time averaging 40 to 5000ms Count averaging 4 to 500 Moving average 2 to 60 Primary delay filter 10 to 5000ms Setting value Disable Sampling CH1 Waring output setting Process alarm setting CH1 W
238. nt input that is equal to or more than the input signal error detection upper limit value or equal to or less than the input signal error detec Section 3 2 3 tion lower limit value is detected Input signal error detection function 1 Process alarm A warning is output when a digital output value is equal to or more than the pro cess alarm upper upper limit value or equal to or less than the process alarm X lower lower limit value Warning output function Section 3 2 4 2 Rate alarm A warning is output when the digital output value changes in a rate by which the digital output value reaches the rate alarm upper limit value or more or the rate alarm lower limit value or less GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD Conversion starting time setting function Q66AD DG only 1 Setting the A D conversion starting time allows A D conversion to be started at the point when the output of the 2 wire transmitter stabilizes Section 3 2 5 1 The power supply to the 2 wire transmitter can be switched ON OFF channel by channel PROGRAMMING Supply power ON OFF function Q66AD DG only 2 Power is supplied to channels that have input range settings of 4 to 20mA 2 wire transmitter input OH 4 to 20mA Extended mode 2 wire transmitter input AH or User range setting 2 wire transmitter input FH and that are set to Enabled in A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Section 3 4 2 1 Co
239. nversion of A D conversion values to preset percentage values and loading Scaling function into the buffer memory is available Section 3 2 6 Programming steps for the scaling can be eliminated ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Online module change 1 The module can be changed without the system being stopped Chapter 7 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 2 Function List 3 13 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Cel ries 1 If the module is changed online to a module that has no extended mode for analog input range under the following input range settings an intelligent function module switch error will occur Q68AD G 4 to 20mA extended mode Ay 1 to 5V extended mode By Q66AD DG 4 to 20mA extended mode 2 wire transmitter input Ay 4 to 20mA extended mode current input Cy 3 14 3 2 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 2 1 A D conversion methods F 1 Sampling processing A D conversion is performed successively for analog input values and the z converted digital output values are stored in the buffer memory The sampling processing time varies depending on the number of channels used number of channels set as A D conversion enable 3 Sampling processing time No of channels used x 10 ms o Example When setting 6 for the number of channels used 6 x10 60 ms aie 2 Averaging processing a Time averaging A D conversion is made for the preset period of time the sum of
240. o 20mA High resolution mode a CH3 CH4 to not used ow ans 3 Program conditions 588 FOL x a The following averaging processing specification is used for each channel on d m CH1 Sampling processing CH2 Time averaging 50 times ue e CH3 Primary delay filtering 100ms SE Q0 b CH1 uses the input signal error detection function Refer to Section 3 2 3 T e Input signal error detection 10 HC 582 c CH2 uses the warning output setting process alarm Refer to Section 3 4 1 1 A e Process alarm lower lower limit value 1000 e Process alarm lower upper limit value 1500 o e Process alarm upper lower limit value 6000 2 e Process alarm upper upper limit value 7000 3 d CH3 uses the warning output setting rate alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 2 g e Rate alarm warning detection period 50ms e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 3 e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 1 u gt a e In the event of a write error an error code shall be displayed in BCD format 2 X The error code shall be reset after removal of the cause 29 0 Z O O a i 2 O E 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 2 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 6 2 1 Before creating a program Perform the following steps before creating a program 1 Wiring of external devices Mount the Q68AD G on the base unit and connect the external devices e For all of CH1 to CH3 run the cables for current input For details refe
241. o b15 is fixed at 0 Processing method Setting value Sampling processing OH Time averaging 1H Count averaging 2H Moving average 3H Primary delay filter 4H Setting example of Q68AD G When setting channel 1 to count averaging channel 2 to time averaging channel 3 to primary delay filter and channel 4 to sampling processing store 412H into Un G24 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO o o o o JE o o of of o tja o 1 o ma CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 4 1 2 Setting example of Q66AD DG When setting channel 1 to time averaging channel 2 to count averaging channel 3 to moving average and channel 4 to primary delay filter store 4321H into Un G24 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bE b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 4321H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 AN NO NY 4 3 2 1 Point When a value outside the above setting range has been written to a channel sampling processing is applied to the channel 3 60 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 9 Averaging process specification Un G24 Un G25 3 SPECIFICATIONS M ALS eG lA eries 3 4 10 CHO maximum value minimum value storage area Un G30 to Un G45 1 For each channel the maximum and minimum values of the converted digital values are stored in this area every sampling time in 16 bit signed binary OVERVIEW 2 The stored values for all channels
242. oduct CD ROM A 13 1 OVERVIEW 1 MELSEC TA eries OVERVIEW This User s Manual describes the specifications handling and programming methods for the type Q68AD G channel isolated analog digital converter module hereinafter referred to as the Q68AD G and type Q66AD DG channel isolated analog digital converter module with signal conditioning function hereinafter referred to as the Q66AD DG which are used with the MELSEC Q series CPU modules The Q66AD DG is exclusively used for current input In this manual the Q68AD G and Q66AD DG are collectively referred to as the A D converter modules 1 1 Features 1 2 3 4 5 Channel isolated The channels are isolated The Q66AD DG is also isolated between the external supply power and channels Multi channel analog input is available a By using a single Q68AD G analog voltage or current inputs of 8 points 8 channels are available b A single Q66AD DG allows connection of 2 wire transmitters of 6 points 6 channels It has an input range for analog current in addition to connections to 2 wire transmitters Power supply to 2 wire transmitter Q66AD DG only Supplying power to the 2 wire transmitter the Q66AD DG does not require the power supply for the 2 wire transmitter Supply power can be switched ON OFF channel by channel by the A D conversion enable disable setting Module protection provided by short circuit protection circuit
243. on connector A6CON4 to reduce resistance of the connection conductor Always ground the shield of the wire of each channel If the external wiring is disconnected during use of voltage input on the Q68AD G depending on the internal circuit characteristics a certain time is required until the digital output reaches a value equivalent to OV To avoid the phenomenon connect a resistor approximately 1M Q across V and V terminals 4 8 4 4 Wiring 4 4 2 External wiring 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries 2 Q66AD DG i uu a For 2 wire transmitter input S 0 3 2 wire LS ay ae 24V z transmitter r P circuit supply 24G e 4 to 20 mA o a B L Va I CHK z Modu Demodu Q nonk 50g lator iar o V gt T 1 Shielded L aS 5 24VDC 24V i 24V 2 24G Filter 0 re 24G m O W Q 4 N b For current input s fe E g n vo 9 z 20 er Current Transmitter 24V gt z P ore ce of g emey 24G m 1 CHK xX F Modu emodul I CHK 2500 lator ftor fid S Me Zg 25 1 Shielded L Q0 E Zo i Eg Exa 4 Dla A Use a
244. on module from the programmable controller CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause a malfunction of the programmable controller system CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the user s manual of the CPU module to use Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point For the Q66AD DG secure the module with fixing brackets after installation to the base unit When using the Q68AD G in an environment where they are frequent vibrations screw the module to the base unit after installation Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the
245. on setting completed flag 3 36 Operating condition setting request ee 3 40 Operating environment 5 4 P Part identification nomenclature cee 4 4 PASS dataen ne a eA a AAS 5 25 5 27 Pass data classification setting 3 73 Performance specifications 0cccceceeeees 3 1 3 3 Primary delay filter ce ceeeceeeeteeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeee 3 16 Process alal eeoa ra ESAS 3 25 Programming procedure essssseeessseerressrersssrees 6 1 Q QCPU Q mode ranirea A 12 R Rate dais aE A E T 3 26 Rate alarm upper lower limit value 0 3 69 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 3 68 Read from PLC eecccceeeeceeeeeeeteteeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaas 5 12 Reference ACCUACY ceccecceeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 3 3 3 12 Remote I O network ccccsecceeeeesseeeeeeees 6 11 6 30 RUN LED wa chain code lian ade ie 4 5 S Sampling Processing s 3 13 Save parameters c ceeeeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenes 5 12 Setting FANGS diir iiia 3 58 Setup and procedures before operation 4 1 Short Circuit protection ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 3 3 Software Package ccccecececeeceeeeteeeeeeesteeeeeeeenaas 2 4 Software Version ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 2 4 Supply power ON OFF function 0 000 3 13 SUPPIY VONAGE Taione AEEA 3 3 Switch setting for intelligent function module 4 10 Sy
246. or clear request Q68AD G X Y0 to X YF X10 Digital output value read command input signal X11 Input signal error detection reset signal X12 Error reset signal QX10 X10 to X1F Y20 to Y2B 1 Devices used for the auto refresh function of GX Configurator AD Error code display BCD 3 digits 2 Operating the utility package a Initial setting Refer to Section 5 4 Set the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 Refer to Section 6 2 for the settings CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type Module model name A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Q684D G Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting CH1 Averaging process specification CH1 Average time Average number of times Move average Time constant settings Average time 40 5000ms Average number of times 4 500times Move average 2 60times Linear delay filter 10 5000ms CH1 Warming output setting Process alarm setting Disable Make text file Details Select input _Setting range Enable Disable End setup 6 5 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 2 2 Programming example using the utility package Cancel QY10 Y20 to Y2F 6 PROGRAMMING M eLS eG cries b Auto refresh setting Refer to Section 5 5 Set the digital output values warning output flags input
247. or intelligent function module screen Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module a DEE Click on Switch setting on the I O assignment Be setting screen to display the screen shown at left 5 E 0000 0000 g oO EE then set switches 1 to 5 ii EZ Q i The switches can easily be set if values are aoe Bcs z EGA an entered in hexadecimal Change the entry format 2 lt nfa to hexadecimal and then enter the values a5 130 13 14 14 X D Cancel o O A A W E a S LW z9 oz CS a OO 0 O O E N W a O ra 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 4 11 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 12 Mi LSet Q series 4 6 Offset Gain Settings When using the user range setting make the offset gain setting according to the operation indicated in Section 4 6 1 or Section 4 6 2 When the Factory default is used offset gain setting is not necessary If the utility package is installed perform the offset gain settings according to the procedure described in Section 5 6 2 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries 4 6 1 Offset gain settings Q68AD G
248. or test module screen Start I O No 1 Module type gt Module model name Monitor test 1 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal The screen can also be started from System monitor of GX Developer Version 6 or later Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for details Setting screen Monitor Test Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q68AD G Setting item Current value Setting value Eror code Warring output flag process alarm Warning output lag rate alarm Input signal eror detection flag Setting range CHT to CH4 Setting range CH5 to CH8 XZY monitor test Maximum value minimum value information XAY monitor test Max value min value info CH1 Operating condition setting CH2 Operating condition setting CH3 Operating condition setting v CH1 Operating condition setting CH2 Operating condition setting CH3 Operating condition setting Flash ROM setting Details Curent value Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor gt 1 X Y monitor test Max value min value info X Y monitor test Maximum value minimum value information Module information Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module mode
249. pecifies channel where offset setting will be made We XUA UO a Pe F 1 H ovp Do G22 Specifies offset setting channel Uo woe G Japara memory Specifies channel where gain setting will be made WI XOA UO 1 wove DO G23 Specifies gain setting channel UO EEE memory Hg X0B i iya se YOR 4 Turns ON channel change request YB XOB FRS 08 q Turns OFF channel change request YB Changes offset gain values e Turns ON offset gain F LSE We change request YC XOG j f j i i i i 1 Changes channel where offset gain setting will be made i i i i i r FRS vog Turns OFF offset gain F change request YC Registers offset gain setting results to module H KOA Turns ON user range change i i Lsp me request YA KOA fee sink Turns OFF user range change So DE ei eee a ea a a eee oy oe request YA Switches to normal mode We Gave aa Stores setting of dedicated i J instruction G OFFGAN into D1 G OFFGAN uo D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN XOA Processing in normal mode END The program in the dotted area is a common program 4 20 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries
250. performing initialization check whether the contents of the initialization program are correct or not 1 Normal system configuration The sequence program should perform initialization on the leading edge of Module READY X9 of the A D converter module When control resumption is executed Module READY X0 turns ON and initialization is performed If the sequence program performs initialization only one scan after RUN initialization is not performed 2 When used on remote I O network Insert a user device that will execute initialization at any timing initialization request signal into the sequence program After control resumption turn ON the initialization request signal to perform initialization If the sequence program performs initialization only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network initialization is not performed 7 35 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M aL 26 fel ceries 5 Resumption of control i im a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to gt redisplay the Online module change screen click the Execution button to z resume control Module ready X0 turns on Online module change Operation Target module 5 E Module change execution 1 0 address 000H E es Module name Q684D G 5 Installation confirma
251. period CH3 rate alarm upper limit value CH3 rate alarm lower limit value CH1 input signal error detection setting value Turns ON operation condition setting request Y9 Turns OFF Module ready check flag Turns OFF operation condition setting request Y9 Read the A D conversion completed flag Read the CH1 digital output value Read the CH2 digital output value Read the CH3 digital output value Read the warning output flag Process alarm Read the warning output flag Rate alarm Processing at CH2 process alarm upper limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH2 process alarm lower limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate alarm upper limit value warning occurrence Processing at CH3 rate alarm lower limit value warning occurrence 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection sM400 uU0 ov G49 x2m50 Read the input signal i error detection flag z M5 N Processing at error detection Processing at CH1 input W signal error detection Z x11 x0C tt sez YOE J Turn ON the error clear request YF u Error code display and reset processing O x12 XOF uo ttt eco Gig x3yz0 J Output the error code in BCD se Yor J Turn ON the error clear request YF s YOr xoc XoF E r g r g Rst YOR J Turn OFF the error clear request YF z T
252. pleted flag S M12 M13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm S M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag 5 X20 Initialization request signal i X21 Digital output value heed command input sinal QX10 X20 to X2F g X22 Input signal error detection reset signal X23 Error reset signal Y30 to Y3B Error code display BCD 3 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F iT X120 Module ready 2 X129 Operating condition setting completed flag a X12C Input signal error detection signal 39 Q68AD G SZ X12E A D conversion completed flag XIY120 to X Y12F 55 X12F Error flag 2 Y129 Operating condition setting request m Y12F Error clear request Z 1 Devices used for the auto refresh function of GX Configurator AD Q i ra 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 12 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries Point For details on the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the Q Correspond ing MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 6 13 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 6 3 1 Programming example using the utility package i 1 Operating GX Developer gt gt a CPU parameter setting Network type MNET H Remote master Starting I O No 0000H 5 O Network No 1 5 Total stations 1 2 Mode On
253. pling processing A multiple of conver sion cycle 10ms x No of conversion enabled channels e For averaging processing A multiple of time or count averaging conversion cycle Reset the time averaging or count averaging set ting so that the corresponding rate alarm warning detection period is a multiple of the time or count averaging conversion period Un G149 is outside the range of 0 to 250 O indicates the channel number set incorrectly When the Same upper limit value lower limit value is selected for the input signal error detection extended setting CHO input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Reset the input signal error detection setting value to within 0 to 250 800 Un G149 is outside the range of 0 to 251 Un G157 is outside the range of 0 to 251 O indicates the channel number set incorrectly When the Different upper limit value lower limit value is selected for the input signal error detection extended setting e Input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Reset the input signal error detection lower limit setting value and input signal error detection upper limit setting value within 0 to 251 90013 side the range of 32000 to 32000 O indicates the channel number set incorrectly The scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G77 is set out Correct the scaling upp
254. process alarm function has been made 2 z o E lt Q L O wW a N i Zz valid O 2 As soon as the digital output values return to within the setting ranges on all channels o z enabled for A D conversion this signal turns OFF automatically and the ALM LED is bs ee also extinguished a m b Rate alarm 2989 1 This signal turns ON when the varying rate of the digital output value falls outside the Oo m Warning output varying rate range set to the rate alarm upper lower limit values Un G122 to Un G137 X8 signal on any of the channels enabled for A D conversion after the rate alarm function has been made valid m 2 As soon as the varying rates of the digital output values return to within the preset 2 varying ranges on all channels enabled for A D conversion this signal turns OFF g 2 automatically and the ALM LED is also extinguished 2 6 mannaa gt Performed by the A D converter module xa gt Performed by the sequence program Dale Warning output flag 0 Warning occurrence 0 Un G50 Un G51 Process alarm rate alarm Ni 1 I I h Z k ne 4 gg Warning output signal X8 5 O 1 A watchdog timer error occurs when the program calculations are not completed within the scheduled time due to malfunctions of A D converter module hardware When a watchdog timer error occurs the RUN LED for the A D converter module turns off W E 3 Q S Lu z9 a lt ZE OO 0 Z
255. put value wl 3 IWhen the external supply power to the Q66AD DG switches OFF the A D conversion 2 XE A D conversion completed flag turns OFF and A D conversions stop with the previous digital output values completed flag being held When the external supply power switches ON A D conversions resume and as soon as all E oe conversion enabled channels have completed conversions the A D conversion completed flag ave turns ON Pa The processing such as averaging processing or primary delay filter starts from the first time S g FOL after resumption of A D conversion Han 1 This signal turns ON when a write error occurs 2 To clear the error code set the error clear request YF to ON A gt Performed by the A D converter module i ral gt Performed by the sequence program S lt Error code Un G19 Q0 Error occurs eS my z6 XF Error flag J 59 1 ESO l I s J Lt XN 4 hoo Error flag XF h h Z Error clear request YF 3 1 Q66AD DG only 5 fe fg A W E 3 a S LW z9 Ia ZE OO 0 Z E 0 S T n W a fe ra 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 39 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Output signals Device No Signal Name Description 1 Turn this signal ON when making any of the following settings valid A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO CHO Averag
256. r lower limit value 1000 e Process alarm lower upper limit value 1500 e Process alarm upper lower limit value 6000 e Process alarm upper upper limit value 7000 d CH3 uses the warning output setting rate alarm Refer to Section 3 2 4 2 e Rate alarm warning detection period 50ms e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 3 e Rate alarm upper limit value 0 1 e In case of a write error an error code is indicated in BCD format The error code is reset after the error cause is resolved 4 List of devices Device Function D1 W1 CH1 Digital output value D2 W2 CH2 Digital output value D3 W3 CH3 Digital output value D6 D7 W6 W7 Warning output flag D8 ws Input signal error detection flag D9 W9 1 Error code D10 A D conversion completed flag M12 M13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag X20 Initialization request signal X21 Digital output value read command input sinal QX10 X20 to X2F X22 Input signal error detection reset signal X23 Error reset signal Y30 to Y3B Error code display BCD 3 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F X120 Module ready X129 Operating condition setting completed flag X12C Input signal error detection signal Q66AD DG X12E A D conversion completed flag XI2F Error flag X Y120 to X Y12F Y129 Operating condition setting request Y12F Error clea
257. r request 1 Devices used for the auto refresh function of GX Configurator AD Point For details on the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the Q Correspond ing MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 6 5 1 Programming example using the utility package 1 Operating GX Developer it gt ne a CPU parameter setting z Network type MNET H Remote master Starting I O No OOOOH Network No r E Total stations 1 lt x Mode Online o mT Network range assignment Z HO M station gt A station M station lt A station a StationNo ie ie x x Paints Start End Paints Start End Paints Start End Paints Start End 1 256 0100 DIFF 256 0o00 OOFF 256 0100 DIFF 256 ooo ooFF v D a M station lt F station M station lt A station 0 E e ee Raa Sareea wW T o u O W Q N Link side Dev name Points Stat End z Transfer SB SB O Transfer SW lt Random cyclic W T Random cyclic AK 5 Transferl Zz a uu Transfer2 a Wg Transfer3 2 5 2 Transfer4 a Ee a Transfer5 Transfer we SE Q0 ak axe I 582 e oO z q E Oo ie ina a W a S LW z9 oz CS a OO 0 zZ He O O E N W a a O ae e 6 5 For Use in Remote I O Network Q66AD DG
258. r to 4 4 2 2 b For current input CH1 external device CH2 external device lt CH3 external device Il gt j gt j gt j gt gt r mi gt B Joo gt a o a gt a gt feo gt sa Dl D w a co gt oOo gt B20 Q68AD 6 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 2 1 Before creating a program 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Based on the setting conditions given in Section 6 2 2 make the intelligent function it gt module switch settings ma gt a Each switch setting 1 Switch1 Switch2 Input range setting Zz lt Switch 2 gt lt Switch 1 gt z o o ol o a o o o o n 5 CH8 CH7CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 a o L CH1 to CH3 OH 4 to 20mA input 6 CH4 to CH8 OH default 2 2 Switch3 Empty No setting required O 3 Switch4 Mode setting T o lt Switch 4 gt 5 W O F joi O H T Fixed at 0 Setting of normal resolution mode high resolution mode z All channels FH High resolution mode 2 Setting of normal mode Offset gain setting mode o All channels OH normal mode ava 290 ang 4 Switch5 Use prohibited 0H fixed a0 Be lt Switch 5 gt 0 10 O O H
259. r to Chapter 7 for details of online module change 2 Program examples The program in the dotted area of a is common to a b and c Is this example the I O signals for the Q68AD G are X YO to X YF e Channel selection 02 00 00 cee eee eee ee MO Offset seting eres errrrrersreresren ee M1 e e EEE E EEEE E T E E EET M2 e Channel change command sassa aaaea aaea M3 e Offset gain setting value write command to the module M4 Mode switching 0 0 e ee ee M5 e Channel designation storage device 00 e eee DO e Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN setting storage device D1 4 14 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 6 1 Offset gain settings Q68AD G 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries a When switching the mode using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN The following program switches to the offset gain setting mode with the dedicated z rt instruction G P OFFGAN changes the channel where offset gain setting will be made writes the offset gain values to the Q68AD G and then switches to the z normal mode Switches to offset gain setting mode z hi wave Ki D1 Stores setting of dedicated 2 instruction G OFFGAN into D1 g J 6 OFFGAN ug D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN 2 2 E EE ae El Sahl Oa lee te get ah E E duel le BS N
260. ram in the dotted area of a is common to a b and c In this example the I O signals for the Q66AD DG are X Y0 to X YF e Channel selection 2 0 0000 cece eee MO Offset seling eta cetc neue Ved dwekvetedwa devs A M1 Gall SONNI sesat r cance ec eeet nate ad eeane Poke Pewee ee M2 e Channel change command 22 20e00 aes M3 e Offset gain setting value write command to the module M4 Mode switching 0 cece tee M5 e Offset gain change command 2 200005 M6 e Normal mode checking signal 00000 cee eee M50 e Module ready check flag 00 c eee tee M100 e Channel designation storage device 000 0 eee DO e Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN setting storage device D1 a When switching the mode using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN The following program switches to the offset gain setting mode with the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN changes the channel where offset gain setting will be made writes the offset gain values to the Q66AD DG and then switches to the normal mode Switches to offset gain setting mode Ns Stores setting of dedicated J instruction G OFFGAN into D1 6 OFFGAN uo D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN N Moye KI 01 Specifies channel where offset gain setting will be made i ruove Hi w Stores channel where offset i L J gain setting will be made into DO S
261. re the old module was dismounted in the original system and install the connector e After mounting the module click the Execution button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module ready X0 remains OFF Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address O00H Module name Q6840 G Module change execution Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel 7 17 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system ONLINE MODULE CHANGE eG Q series 4 Operation check a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control resumption Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address 00H Module change execution Installation confirmation Module name Q6840 G Status Module control restart F A Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel b Click the OK button to leave the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer i The online module change mode is stopped J Even if the stop
262. reful not to let foreign matter such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module They may cause fires failure or malfunction The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate ventilation Starting and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module In the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change is used and on the MELSECNET H remote I O stations modules can be replaced online during energizing However there are some restrictions on replaceable modules and the replacement procedures are predetermined for each module For details refer to the chapter of the online module change in this manual Do not install remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply b
263. rent mA 3 4 to 20mA Expanded mode Analog input practical range 1 l l 1 1 1 l 1 l i L 0 4 20 22 Analog input current mA Digital output value 2 0 12287 12000 4095 4000 96 288 MELSEC TA eries to 20mA Analog input practical range High resolution mode if 0 20 Analog input current mA Fig 3 3 Input characteristic of Q66AD DG 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 2 I O conversion characteristic 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries Point 1 Set within the analog input range and digital output range for each input range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid use shown by the dotted lines in Fig 3 3 2 Do not input an analog input current of 30mA or less and 30mA or more The input elements may be damaged Set the offset gain values for the User range setting marked within a range which satisfies the following conditions OVERVIEW 3 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a Gain value lt 24mA offset value 2 OmA b Use one of the following formulas according to the resolution mode to be set 1 Normal resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 5 5mA 2 High resolution mode Gain value Offset value 16 0mA 4 When an analog value that exceeds the range of the digital output value is 2 z E lt Q L
264. restoration M12 GP OGLOAD ud D100 M20 Dedicated instruction M20 M21 GP OGLOAD t RST M12 M20 M21 m PWR Performs processing at abnormal completion ENO 1 For the Q66AD DG the program in the dotted area is not necessary App 7 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD APPENDIX Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR MELSEC Cel series Restores the offset gain values of the user range setting stored in the CPU to the A D con verter module Usable devices Eea device eae direct device System user JO Set data e y user File oo register Word S Intelligent function module device UD GO Index register Constant D O Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G OGSTOR G OGSTOR Un S D Command p GP OGSTOR OGSTOR Un D Set data Set data Description Setting range Un Start 1 O number of the module 0 to FEH Data type Binary 16 bits s Start number of the device in which control data is stored Within the range of the specified device Device name D processing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion Device that is turned ON 1 scan on completion of dedicated instruction Within the range of the specified device Bit 1 When executing the G P OGLOAD instruction specify the device designated in S
265. riting to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memory writing condition pg E y t MOV xK xK Writing Operating Operating f request Condition condition setting seting request completed Nh oe ene ee lag 3 Areas used to restore the User range settings offset gain values when the module is replaced online Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change 3 46 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 5 6 edad Description Default R W Reference z ipti u r Decimal a CH7 Input signal error detection setting value CH7 Input P ui 94H 148 l ne 50 Riw z signal error detection lower limit setting value O CH8 Input signal error detection setting value CH8 Input 95H 149 oF 50 Rw signal error detection lower limit setting value 96H 150 CH1 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 6 97H 151 CH2 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIwW 2 z 98H 152 CH3 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW2 Section 3 4 22 o ne 99H 153 CH4 Input signal error
266. rocedure 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEGC KE eries b If the saved buffer memory contents are not yet prerecorded record them in the following procedure 1 Make the pass data classification setting Un G200 g 2 Turn operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON 3 Compare the offset gain values of the industrial shipment settings and user range settings Un G202 to Un G233 with the range reference table Refer to a Section 7 4 for the range reference table E 4 Ifthe values are proper record the offset gain values of the pass data a classification setting industrial shipment settings and user range settings or 1 The Q66AD DG does not require the setting and recording of the pass data classification setting B 2 Point If the buffer memory values compared with the reference table are not proper 2 save and restoration of the user range cannot be executed Before resuming F module control follow the flowchart in Section 4 6 1 for the Q68AD G or follow E the flowchart in Section 4 6 2 for the Q66AD DG and make offset gain setting in g the device test of GX Developer se Perform mode switching by making the setting of the mode switching setting a Un G158 Un G159 and turning operating condition setting request Y9 from 2 OFF to ON o g Note that if module control is resumed without offset g
267. rsion starting time is set to Oms Un G10 10ms A D conversion m processing time 2 S LW z9 a lt ZE exe 0 Z E fe I a W a 2 O A 3 2 Function List 3 29 3 2 5 Conversion starting time setting function Q66AD DG only 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 2 6 Scaling Function 1 With this function A D conversion values are converted to rate values and loaded into the buffer memory 2 A digital value stored in CHO digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 is converted to a value in the range set by CHO scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G77 The converted value is stored in CHO scaling value storage area Un G54 to Un G61 3 The scaling function is used for processed values when using the averaging processing or primary delay filter 4 The setting of CHO scaling upper lower limit value Un G62 to Un G77 varies depending on whether to use the factory default range setting or the user range setting for the input range a When using the factory default setting for the input range Set a value that should correspond to the upper limit of digital output as the scaling upper limit value and a value that should correspond to the lower limit as the scaling lower limit value Example 1 Input range setting 0 to 20mA or 4 to Example 2 Input range setting 10 to 10V 20mA Q68AD G Q66AD DG Q68AD G Digital output value Digital output value Scaling logbooeeeoetee cee eek
268. rter module should be purchased sepa rately by the user The following tables show the connector types and the crimp contact tool a Connector types Type Model name Applicable wire size Soldering type A6CON1 2 gtralght out 0 3mm AWG22 stranded Crimp contact t 2 2 rimp con act type AGCON2 0 088mm lt to 0 24mm AWG28 to straight out 24 stranded Soldering type AGCON4 2 straight out diagonal out Oeste epee stranded 1 The AGCONS pressure displacement type straight out connector cannot be used for the A D con verter module b Crimp contact tool Type Model name Applicable wire size Contact FUJITSU COMPONENT 0 088mm to LIMITED Crimp contact tool FCN 363T T005 H n 0 24mm AWG26 to 24 http www fcl fujitsu com en 4 6 4 3 Part Names 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries 4 4 Wiring The wiring precautions and examples of module connection are provided below OVERVIEW 4 4 1 Wiring precautions In order to optimize the functions of the A D converter module and ensure system reliability external wiring that is protected from noise is required Please observe the following precautions for external wiring CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 Use separate cables for the AC control circuit and the external input signals of the Q68AD G to prevent influences of AC surge or induction 2 Use separate cables for the AC control circuit the external inp
269. s i fe Fixed at 0 2 E z 1 If any other than OH is set to Switch 5 an error occurs E 2 EGA gt ce b Write the settings in a to the Q68AD G On GX Developer s Parameter setting screen select the I O assignment tab click Switch setting and make settings of Switch 1 to 5 on the screen shown S below z lt Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Q a Input format HEX w Sit Type Monde name Sara Serch Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 ft i nn ee aa ee ee a O y eS E ee 29 Ze oS o E N W a Y e 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 4 6 2 1 Before creating a program 6 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries 6 2 2 Programming example using the utility package 1 List of devices Device Function D1 D11 CH1 Digital output value D2 D12 CH2 Digital output value D3 D13 CH3 Digital output value D6 D7 Warning output flag ps Input signal error detection flag pg Error code MO to M2 A D conversion completed flag M12 M13 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm M34 M35 CH3 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 CH1 Input signal error detection flag XO XC Module ready Input signal error detection signal XE A D conversion completed flag XF Error flag YQ Operating condition setting request YF Err
270. s alarm lower lower limit value and entered the warning output range zone the warning output flag process alarm Un G50 and warning output signal X8 turn ON and the ALM LED is lit to indicate the warning A warning will be output according to the following digital output values Value set in scaling enable 0 Disable CHO digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 disable setting Un G53 1 Enable CHO scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b After a warning was output when the digital output value reaches a value less than the process alarm upper lower limit value or a value more than the process alarm lower upper limit value 0 is stored in the corresponding bit of the warning output flag Un G50 for the channel The warning output signal X8 turns OFF and the ALM LED turns OFF when the digital output values in all channels get out of the warning output range 2 z o E lt Q L O wW a N Warning output range 7 gt Time Zz O igi s Warning output range outside ig Digital output value Warning g outp g ao Included ZD0 occurrence Zaw Warning FE iit 2 occurrence 2899 Upper upper D Tm limit value Upper lower limit value N Warning cancel Ae CH1 digital output 7 m value i fa SE i d A Lower upper Warning cancel 98 limit value CH2 digital i ioi ays output value i p 2 Lower lower TA ayn irai l i i
271. ser range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TE eries c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor Installed status Base 0 2 3 Base Module MasterPLC gt 2 E E Main base Unmo Unmo unti funti ng jng Q25PHCPU Parameter status Mode Trt Address 20 30 C System monitor 2 3 Online module change None None Powe rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16pt 16pt Status Module system error g Module error i Module warning Detailed inf of power supply Hi Module change Close d Choose Online Debug Device test on GX Developer and set the prerecorded values to the buffer memory e Turn the user range writing request YA from OFF to ON to restore the user set values to the module After confirming that the offset gain setting mode status flag XA is ON turn OFF the user range write request YA f Enable the conversion of the channel to be used in A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Monitor CH O digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion is processed normally g Since the new module is in a default status it must be initialized by a sequence program after control resumption Before
272. setting of 100 function module switch setting in GX Developer GX Developer Refer to Section 4 5 O indicates the channel number set incorrectly Turn the power OFF and ON again If the error occurs again the module may be malfunctioning Please consult 111 Hardware error of the module i a B your local Mitsubishi representative explaining the detailed description of the problem 412 The setting of the intelligent function module switch 5 is Set a correct parameter value in the parameter setting of other than 0 GX Developer Refer to Section 4 5 Perform the offset gain setting again for all of the chan nels that use the user range settings 420 An invalid value is set in the offset gain setting If the error occurs again the module may be The number of the error channel is not identified malfunctioning Please consult your local Mitsubishi rep resentative explaining the detailed description of the problem Perform the offset gain setting again for the error chan nel ee An invalid value is set in the offset gain setting If the error occurs again the module may be O indicates the channel number set incorrectly malfunctioning Please consult your local Mitsubishi rep resentative explaining the detailed description of the problem Bee The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed in the offset Do not execute the G P OGSTOR instruction in the off gain setting mode set gain setting mode e The G P OGSTOR
273. signal error detection z W flags and error codes of CH1 to CH3 W gt Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No Module model name Q68AD G 6 ete Mois side Mock Ste Translar Pe side etting item uter size Rne direction evice o CHT Digtal output value 1 ay ae CH2 Digital output value 1 gt D2 2 2 N gt 3 gt 3 CH Digital output value gt 2 CHS Digital output value gt 2 CH1 Maximum value gt 3 m oO W Q Make text file End setup 2 age 7 Zz c Writing the intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 5 3 3 g Write the intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module oe W This operation is performed using the parameter setting module selection screen 256 W a Wg POR wow nom 5 we 0 T oo Fo i Zz ZO s EXa 50a e z lt E fo ina a W E a S LW z9 Ja lt E ons 0 zZ He O fe E N W a ae e 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G 6 6 6 2 2 Programming example using the utility package PROGRAMMING 3 Programming example Read digital output values xO AQE Ya S 1 i 1 HF mov HO E WOY H r WOY W2 E HOY Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurre SH400 wav Woy M12 M13 M34 M35 Input signal error detection status and processing at error dete
274. sing scaling function 16 bit signed binary 32768 to 32767 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode 2 g Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum Bg 5 j A tow output value resolution output value resolution aan 5 0 to 10V 2 5 mV 0 to 16000 0 625 mV Be 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 7 25 mV 0 416 mV ges Oto 12000 ________ 1 to 5V 1 0 mV 0 333 mV 1 to 5V 3000 to 1000 to 4500 1 0 mV 0 333 mV we Voltage Extended mode 13500 g lt isti 16000 to 2 lO characteristics 10 to 10V 2 5 mV ans 0 625 mV ee maximum resolution 4000 to 4000 EE Users range settin 0 375 m V 8 12000 t0 0 333 mvs ae I s Sram 12000 aaa 568 0 to 20mA 54A 1 66 4 A 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 pp ____ 4 to 20mA 4uUA 1 33 UA 4 to 20mA 3000 to Current 1000 to 4500 9 Extended mode i 13500 LBI HA gt 12000 to Users range setting 4000 to 4000 1 37 u A8 1 33 u A8 12000 Oo F 0 1 a CEE Reference Normal resolution mode 4digit 2 Accuracy 4 a eaters accuracy High resolution mode 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 16digit iv digital output High resolution mode Other than the above ranges 12digit 2 3 Temperature value P 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C g ii coefficient WO Common mode Common mode voltage Input Common ground input voltage OV 500VAC 2 g characteristic Common mode voltage rejection ratio VCM lt 500V 60Hz 107dB 50Hz 106dB Oe Sampling cycle 10ms channel Response time 20ms A Absolute maximum input Voltage 1
275. sion Characteristic c ccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeieeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeees 5 23 5 6 4 P ss d ta Q68AD G P minie a e thine hia AA eee ae hee 5 25 5 6 5 Passdata Q6GAD DG rate htiiccteceuokt tees cphestideds codlsyenennsyautieenndes ussite ieasgiaebteye EA E RT 5 27 5 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh Setting eeessseesesessserrssserrresstterrsserirressrrrnsssrrrnnne 5 28 DIO E R FB E E ek T E E T T EN Matas T E E E E e 5 30 5 8 1 E A ci een ete EEE E AE PRAT E EN ea ee E EE 5 30 5 8 2 Paste an FB to a sequence program eccececceeceeeeeeeeeeee tees ceaeeaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesansaneaeess 5 32 5 8 3 Convert compile a sequence program sssssseeissesiiisssttirttstttrtsttttntststtnnsattttnnnstttnnnnsten rnant 5 33 6 PROGRAMMING 6 1 to 6 38 G21 Progamming Procedencia sheet o WM isicacedeseuacd ce Metled odeeulvedages Weiteeadadidbacdeceesldoate aie 6 1 6 2 For Use in Normal System Configuration Q68AD G cece etceeee eee etieee eee eaeeeeeetaaeeeeeeees 6 2 6 2 1 Before creating PrOQram c ccccececsecceceeeessccececeeeeenececesseeneceeensaeseseeseneneeceeetesteceesseeeceeeeenaaes 6 3 6 2 2 Programming example using the utility package 0 eee eee ceeeee eee eeee eter eettaeeeeeeetnaeeeeeeenaaees 6 5 6 2 3 Programming example without using the utility PACKAGE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeaaees 6 8 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 00 eceeeceeeeee
276. sion methods 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries Moving average processing at the preset count of 4 times A D conversion value Sampling time 12000 gt First storage Second storage gt Third storage 0 F T A D conversion completed flag ON ime ms Data transition inside buffer memory First storage Second storage Third storage 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 gt 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 3 Primary delay filter A digital value whose transient noise has been smoothed is output according to the preset time constant The degree of smoothing varies with the time constant setting The relational expression of the time constant and digital output value is indicated below ifn 1 1 Yn 0 If n 2 Y 1 a 1 n yn 1 yn yn y atata O yr ifn 3 At Yn Yn 1 yn Yn 1 At TA Yn Current digital output value yn Pre smoothing digital output value Yn 1 Immediately preceding digital output Yn 1 Immediately preceding value pre smoothing digital output value n Sampling count At A D conversion time 0 01 x number of conversion enabled chan nels s TA Time constant s 1 The A D conversion completed flag turns ON when n 2 2 3 16 3 2 Function List 3 2 1 A D conversion methods 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries
277. status z checking O SW74 0 4 K3 s y E T Remote O station data link status s checking UT ita Remote I O parameter communication O status checking fe E s320 29 RST M103 HO T100 T101 no T102 5 T103 S L O T104 W o 7 SB20 T100 T101 T102 v2 H M100 Master module status checking M103 t s r M101 3 nae mos uic0 fea inn Initial setting ea 5 tt i PLS m102 tow a Wg M101 8 Q ST M101 fh 2 m nom SET M103 5 Ww Ox 5 exe Fo i oz Zo Eo EXa 2O e o z lt a 0 fe a a wW E a S WO zZ oz CS a OO 0 Z O O E N uw m O ra 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility package 6 18 6 PROGRAMMING 6 19 6 3 For Use in Remote I O Network Q68AD G 6 3 2 Programming example without using the utility package M102 MOV HOFS D1000 MOV K50 D1002 mov K100 D1003 mov H420 D1024 mov HOFE D1047 mov HOFBFD D1048 MOV K1000 D1090 mov K1500 D1091 Mov k6000 D1092 mov K7000 D1093 mov K50 D1120 mov K3 D1130 mov K1 D1131 mov K100 D1142 M102 X129 y129 Ho gt 2 Remo g1 K1 K1 H2 KO D1000 K4 M200 M200 M201 Je REMTO ai K1 K1 H2 K24 D1024 K1 M210 M210 M211 yz REMTO a K1 K1 H2 K47 D1047 K2 M220 M220 M221 t zP REMTO J1 K1 K1 H2 K90 D1090 K4 M230 M230 M231 J renTo oi K1 K1 H2 K120 D1120 K1 M24
278. strial shipment settings gain value System S 12 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 13 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 14 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 15 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 16 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 17 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 18 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 19 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 20 CH1 user range settings offset value System S 21 CH1 user range settings gain value System S 22 CH2 user range settings offset value System S 23 CH2 user range settings gain value System S 24 CH3 user range settings offset value System S 25 CH3 user range settings gain value System S 26 CH4 user range settings offset value System S 27 CH4 user range settings gain value System S 28 CH5 user range settings offset value System S 29 CH5 user range settings gain value System S 30 CH6 user range settings offset value System S 31 CH6 user range settings gain value System S 32 CH7 user range settings offset value System S 33 CH7 user range settings gain value
279. t Q L O wW a N During user range restoration A D conversion stop A D conversion completed flag Un G10 OFF previous digital output value held power of 2 wire transmitter OFF Q66AD DG only After user range restoration A D conversion resumed when user range setting is used A D conversion is resumed at the restored offset gain setting value BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU 3 41 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Cel aries 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment This section describes the buffer memory assignments of the A D converter modules 3 42 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G a gt Point i Do not write data from system area or sequence program to the buffer memory 2 area where writing is disabled Doing so may cause malfunction O z S Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 1 6 zo E areek Description Default 1 Reference 26 ipti u Hexadecimal Decimal ji i Ze On 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 0000x RIW 2 Section 3 4 2 CH1 Average time Average number of
280. t position corresponding to the channel number of the warning output flag rate alarm Un G51 The warning output signal X8 turns OFF only when all channels return to within the setting range Rate alarm warning detection period Digital output value CH1 digital output value CH2 digital output value gt Rate alarm Time warning detection j P eriod Varying rate of 2 Rate alarm digital output value upper limit A value Varying rate of Varying rate of CH2 digital CH1 A tput Feit value Rate alarm output value lower limit 4 value 7 gt Time CH1 rate alarm upper limit value Un G51 b0 CH1 rate alarm lower limit value Un G51 b1 CH2 rate alarm lower limit value Un G51 b2 Warning output signal X8 3 2 Function List 3 2 4 Warning output function 3 26 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries c Set the rate alarm upper limit value lower limit value in 0 1 s increments relative to the maximum value 16000 12000 4000 of the digital output value The setting range is 32768 to 32767 3276 8 to 3276 7 gt W d The setting range of the rate alarm warning detection period is 10 to 5000ms When the period is set to 5000ms the digital values are compared at intervals of 5 seconds to detect the varying rate Z e The rate alarm is judged by converting the rate alarm upper lower limit value into the
281. tection setting Un G47 e CHO input signal error detection setting value CHO input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 CHO input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 The following is a setting example Example Channel where the input range of 4 to 20mA extended mode and the normal resolution mode is set 1 To detect input signal errors at a lower limit value only Input signal error detection extended setting 1 different upper lower limit values e Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 251 input signal error detection disabled e Input signal error detection lower limit setting value 100 10 0 Input signal error detection No error detected upper limit value 21 6mA assess ae ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee es eee ee eee se sss ee E 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA 16mA Gain value Offset value 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA 2 4MA poet t ors sss v Input signal error detection lower limit value 3 2 Function List 3 23 3 2 3 Input signal error detection function OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 z o lt Q L O wW a N BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 3 SPECIFICATIONS Input signal error detection upper limit value 21 6mA
282. ted on a channel basis The setting value upper limit value and lower limit value depends on the input signal error detection extended setting a When Same upper limit value lower limit value is selected e Set the value of the input signal error detection setting for CHO input signal error detection setting Un G142 to Un G149 b When Different upper limit value lower limit value is selected e Set the value of the input signal error detection lower limit for CHO Input sig nal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 e Set the value of the input signal error detection upper limit for CHO Input sig nal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 To validate the setting the Operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Refer to Section 3 3 2 The setting range is 0 to 250 0 to 25 0 Set the value in 0 1 increments Example When setting the input signal error detection setting value to 15 store 150 into the buffer memory If 251 is entered in the CHO Input signal error detection upper limit setting value and CHO Input signal error detection lower limit setting value boxes after Different upper limit value lower limit value is selected for the input signal error detection extended setting the detection function for the upper and lower limits can be disabled 3 70 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 22 CH input signal error detection setting value CH Input signal error dete
283. th GX Configurator AD other system T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEGC KE eries c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor Eo Installed status Base Z Base Module Ww MasterPLC gt Main base 5 Powe Unmo Unmo rsu unti unti pply ng jng Q25PHCPU Zz O g O ae pZ Parameter status r Mode 2 Art Address 0 20 30 C System monitor nO 213 Online module change Powe None None rsu Q25PHCPU pply 16pt 16pt 2 Zz O Status l T Module system error Module error Oo Module warning Eee Detailed inf of power supply 6 Module change p of Close 5 Ww oO Yn d On the pass data screen of GX Configurator AD set the prerecorded values and make a pass data write request Refer to Section 5 6 3 5 6 4 Z z e Monitor CH O digital output values Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the conversion B id m i O is processed normally ZB w 596 FOL wo W Monitor Test oom r Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 i Module model name Q68A4D G 5 W Se Setting item Current value Setting value g A D conversion completed flag 0000000011111111 g 0 CH1 Digital output value 96 o 5 CH2 Digital output value 96 gt O CH3 Digital output valu
284. th the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS mariera ie tlle ces A TA ATAA Share alee A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 0 ec ececcceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaeegs A 5 REVISIONS oittestiadecieselclancdetie ces oteevs tacpiecutiendd E dueettcap ached saaanceecthdenteudeatoneesa dap N A 6 INTRODUC TON Sorana cans Neniesk ietieted a sd canes cadet Nudigdact eaaheg Set en ea pate Mudaaa G A 7 CONTENTS etnitectec artes behav eel evn hneaia a anti tine E win ahh aries A 7 MANUAL G oor aie aa RETAN ASAA AARAA tev cee cases DE EAA AAA A EEA AEA AEE EAA A 11 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC LOW VOLTAGE AND MACHINERY DIRECTIVES een A 11 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeesenaas A 12 PACKING LIST Ea EA wera ccees ibaa E OAA A docs eidiSuae neces ces ea Agee ne teases metres A 12 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 3 AA o Features sc 22hi coe seakng ees a aa dd oa cece a dete daddies 1 1 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 8 2 sApplicable SyStemS e vazeauenteta cabceatsnadaus sua a aa ie ua cor menaseu cesta a a a 2 1 2 2 Precautions on System Configuration c cc cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeeseeeaeeeeseeeeeeeetenneees 2 5 2 3 How to Check the Func
285. the FB name setting to be registered in GX Developer after FB conversion is performed Ex If the FB program name is ABCDE the initial setting is ABCDE and the auto refresh setting is A ABCDE Title Set up a title on a converted FB program Up to 32 single byte characters can be set up as a title 5 28 5 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh Setting 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries 2 Explanation of screen command buttons FB conversion is performed for the checked columns of initial setting and auto refresh setting Conversion OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE OPERATION SETUP AND PROCEDURES ie O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh Setting 5 29 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series 5 8 Usage of FB This section describes the procedure for using FB with GX Developer For details refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block 5 8 1 Outline The procedure for creating FB is shown below 1 Set up the intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto refresh setting 2 Convert the intelligent function module parameter into FB 3 Paste the FB to a sequence program 4 Convert compile the sequence program N
286. the User range settings offset gain values when the module is replaced online Refer to Chapter 7 for details of online module change 2 When the offset gain values of the user range setting are restored the used data are stored The data are stored saved when e Initial setting is written by the utility e The operating condition is set Y9 turns from OFF to ON 1 or e The offset gain values are written in the offset gain setting mode YA turns from OFF to ON 1 The data are not saved when values have been written to the mode switching setting area Un G158 Un G159 3 When restoring the offset gain values of the user range setting set the data saved here into the corresponding area of the module where the data will be restored 4 Buffer memory saving recording procedure for online module change 1 Set the save data classification setting Un G200 2 Turn the operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON 3 Compare the offset gain values of the Factory default and User range settings Un G202 to Un G233 with the range reference values Refer to Section 7 4 for the range reference values 4 If the values are proper record the values of the save data classification setting Factory default and User range settings offset gain value 1 The Q66AD DG does not require the setting and recording of the save data classification setting Point Refer to Section 4 6 for the offset gain value setting metho
287. the following input ranges are selected in the intelligent function module switch setting the analog input ranges can be extended 4 to 20mA Extended mode Analog input range Section3 1 1 1 to 5V Extended mode 10062 or later 2 09K or later extended mode Section4 5 The input ranges supported by the analog input range extended mode cannot be used for products of incom patible version When the warning of input signal error detection is enabled the input signal error detection can be per formed by setting the same value of upper and lower limit or different value of upper and lower limit k The input signal error detection cannot be performed by Section3 2 3 Input signal error detec A 5 j setting the different value of upper and lower limit but 10062 or later 2 09K or later Section3 4 11 tion extended setting i can be performed by setting the same value of upper Section3 4 22 and lower limit Set the buffer memories as follows e Un G47 b15 to b8 Fixed at 0 e Un G150 to Un G157 Reserved system area App 13 Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade APPENDIX Added or changed function Analog input range extended mode 2 Q66AD DG App 2 Q66AD DG Description When the following input ranges are selected in the intelligent function module switch setting the analog input ranges can be extended 4 to 20mA Extended mode For 2 wire transmitter input
288. the offset gain values of the user range setting of the A D converter module to the CPU b There are two types of interlock signals for the G P OGLOAD instruction the completion device D and the status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruc tion is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the G P OGLOAD instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program 4 Execution completion of ON the G OGLOAD a a G OGLOAD instruction or J tee ON Completion device D OE 1 ON Abnormal i completion i Ao oei Status display device OFF eee Normal completion at completion D 1 1 scan 2 Operation error No errors 3 Program example The following program is designed to read the offset gain values of the A D converter module mounted in the position of I O number X YO to X YF when M11 is turned ON Control data setting a ears ee SE Tem De Maa cu ee voltage SET M12 Offset gain value
289. timer TO M51 Rs x M51 2 END Fa fe fg A W E 3 a S LW z9 Ia ZE OO 0 Z E 0 T n W a fe ra 4 6 Offset Gain Settings 4 21 4 6 2 Offset gain settings Q66AD DG 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TE eries Point When running this program together with the normal mode A D conversion pro gram shown in Section 6 4 3 use 1 of this program as the initial setting pro gram To use each function of the Q66AD DG for A D conversion in the normal mode add appropriate initial setting items to the part marked 2 depending on the func tion to be used Refer to an example below 2 Example of adding initial setting items Averaging processing specifications of CH1 and CH2 CH1 Average time Average MOV K50 u number of times Move average G1 J Time constant settings uo CH2 Average time Average Mov K100 q2 J number of times Move average Time constant settings MoV H42 uo Averaging process specification Note When adding this program to the normal mode A D conversion program shown in Section 6 4 3 replace the existing initial setting program with the pro gram marked 1 Before using this program check the device numbers c When switching the mode by making intelligent function module switch setting Only the common program is necessary 4 6 3 A D conversion value storage during offset gain sett
290. ting CH4 Initial setting CHS Initial setting CH6 Initial setting CH7 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting direction CH4 Initial setting CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value CH5 Digital output value CH6 Digital output value CH7 Digital output value CH8 Digital output value CH1 Maximum value CH5 Initial setting CH6 Initial setting CH7 Initial setting Details Move to sub window a fe E q g re z 0 oO x lo a lt Make text file End setup Make text file End setup Refer to Section 5 4 Refer to Section 5 5 D z CH Initial setting fe oO uae i S CH Initial setting screen Y CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q68A4D G Setting item Setting value Ww CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable 3 CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling a CH1 Average time Average number of times O Move average Time constant settings S Average time 40 5000ms Average number of lu times 4 500times wo Move average 2 60times Linear delay fiter 10 5000ms 22 CH1 Waming output setting Process alarm setting Disable a Oo Details Select input 0 Setting range Z Enable O Disable O T al Make text file End setup ha a gt
291. ting contents in the cell Back Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned Space T l Moves the cursor i Moves the cursor one page up p Page Moves the cursor one page down Down Enter Completes the entry in the cell 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 3 1 Common utility package operations 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries 2 Data created with the utility package The following data or files that are created with the utility package can be also han i S dled in GX Developer Figure 5 1 shows respective data or files are handled in which m operation 5 a Ntelligent function module parameter z This represents the data created in Auto refresh setting and they are stored in an z intelligent function module parameter file in a project created by GX Developer g fry Ee Project gt 9 Program m Parameter PLC Parameter 2 Network Parameter 2 Intelligent Function Module Parameter S 8 W D E 26 955 E Poe Wo W oom f4 O E lt q x K5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 5 3 Utility Package Operation 5 7 5 3 1 Common utility package operations 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M ELSEG Q series b Text files A text file can be created by clicking the _ ake tert fie button on the initial setting Auto refresh setting or Monitor Test screen The text files can
292. tion 20 fe fe Module control restart ails 7 A n 6 Change module installation completion A O Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted E Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute 0 z o L O W Q Cancel N Zz O b The Online module change completed screen appears lt ff wi ara 259 MELSOFT series GX Developer a HE FOL W W e oom lI Online module change completed WE S Q0 aL fame aia 592 oO Z 3 o O x A w 5 a ie Ww z m z e W 1 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 36 7 3 6 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program other system is T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series 7 4 Range Reference Table The range reference tables are given below 1 Reference table for offset gain values of industrial shipment settings Un G202 to Un G217 a For Q68AD G The reference values change depending on the setting of the pass data classification setting Un G200 Address Decimal 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 Pass data classification Reference value setting Un G200 Hexadecimal Industrial shipment settings off Voltage specified OV Approx OH set value Current specified OmA Approx OH Industrial shipment settings gain Volta
293. tion 3 4 22 98H 152 CH3 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write con dition of the following I O signals Buffer memory writing condition J v x9 l j F mov sek sok H Writing i Operating Operating l P request condition condition setting sering request completed Lec eee lag L 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 9 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG 5 5 Adaress Description Default R w t Reference ipti u r Hexadecimal Decimal i z 99H 153 CH4 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 R W 2 g 9AH 154 CH5 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 RIW 2 Section 3 4 22 G 9BH 155 CH6 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 50 R W 2 9CH 156 System area 9Du 157 Z 9E 158 DI E Mode switching setting 0 R W Section 3 4 23 lt 9FH 159 g An 160 ii to to System area 2 6 C9 201 s CA 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 0 R W CB 203 CH1 Factory default gain value 0 R W _ x Z CCH 204 CH2 Factory default offset value
294. tion Version Serial No and Software Version ccccccseseseeeeeeeseneeeeees 2 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 74 3 1 Performance Specifications c cccccccccecceeeeceeeeeeeaeceeceeceeeeeecececeaecaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeseseeeecnaeeaeeeeeeeeeneenes 3 1 3 1 1 Performance Specifications liSt ccceceeeeeeeecceccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeseesecesensaeaeeeeeess 3 1 3 1 2 VO conversion characteristic ccccceccececccceeeeeeeeecececeaeeeaeceeceeeeeeeeeceeecaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 3 5 3 1 3 PACCUPEG i ssiede Seas tabe A sea tatallocevts OO lataeyes A a igen tetas 3 12 3 2 SFUNCHOR Listri ie a ace enc a ded bedhead oe eae enna id goede Sade dea eed 3 13 3 2 1 A D conversion methods ainia aeaii eaaa rien edeveee tee Caaan tapea araa daai 3 15 3 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold fUNCtION ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnnsinaeeees 3 18 3 2 3 Input signal error detection FUNCTION 2 0 ee cceeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeieeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeenaaes 3 18 3 2 4 Warning output function erre r n aE EEEE E EREE shee tees TAREE EA O FARRER EES 3 25 3 2 5 Conversion starting time setting function Q66AD DG only ssssssseseessseeerrssseerrrssserrrrssns 3 29 3 2 6 Scaling FUNCHON iis ected ea ea eA ee ieee 3 30 3 3 1 O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeeteeanees 3 33 3 3 1 LAST ORI O SIGHS a 525 cc 8 E
295. to 10V e Depending on the range setting adjust the offset gain values as follows 1 Normal resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 1 5V 2 High resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 4 0V b When Current is selected for the analog range setting e Gain value lt 20mA Offset value 2 OmA e Depending on the range setting adjust the offset gain values as follows 1 Normal resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 5 5mA 2 High resolution mode Gain value Offset value gt 16 0mA 3 Explanation of screen command buttons The entered offset gain value is determined and the I O characteristic diagram is updated Range setting Conversion for the entered value is performed Conversion 5 24 5 6 Monitoring Test 5 6 3 Confirmation of conversion characteristic 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD MELSEC TE eries 5 6 4 Pass data Q68AD G Perform operation in the following sequence to save restore the user range th 3 1 Switch to the pass data screen Perform the operation in Section 5 6 1 to display the Pass data screen Zz Pass data 2 Module information E Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 0 Module model name Q68AD G WE e LE Setting item Current value Setting value A oO CH4 User range settings gain value CHS User range se
296. to reach the A D converter inside the Q68AD G 6 Current value indicates value of instant input current that does not break module inner electrical resistance 7 For details on I O conversion characteristics refer to Section3 1 2 1 8 The maximum resolution for the user range setting 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 1 Performance specifications list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Ke ories Table3 2 Performance Specifications of Q66AD DG Item Specifications Number of analog input points 2 wire mt 6 points 6 channels gt transmitters m ee 4 to 20mADC Input resistance 250 5 Input transmitter on Input resistance Q specification Without 2 wire 0 to 20mADC 1 Input resistance 250Q transmitter z fe Supply voltage 26 2VDC Maximum supply ow 24mADC Supply power current specification Short circuit Available D protection Limit current 25 to 35mA Ee Check terminals Available T 16 bit signed binary normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 high resolution mode Digital output n 288 to 12287 Z Using scaling function 16 bit signed binary 32768 to 32767 o Normal resolution mode High resolution mode L Analog input range Digital out Maximum Digital out Maximum wl put value resolution put value resolution Gi isti i ion Soe 0 to 4000 SHA O to 12000 ene I O
297. to to System area z a 75H 117 Q 1 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled m fo R Read enabled 3 W Write enabled OO 2 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals 5 Buffer memory writing condition i YO xo 5 H Ht L t Mov eK Q Writing Operating Operating a request condition condition W setting ng l D request completed EE lag 2 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 51 3 4 1 Buffer memory assignment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 52 Table3 9 Buffer memory assignment of Q66AD DG 4 5 M ELSEG Eseries Address Description Default R w 1 Reference ipti u Hexadecimal Decimal i 76H 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 77H 119 CH2 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 78H 120 CH3 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIW 2 Section 3 4 20 79H 121 CH4 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 RIw 2 7AH 122 CH5 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 Riw 2 7B 123 CH6 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W 2 7CH 124 System area 7Du 125 7Eu 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Riw 2 7Fu 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 RIW 2 80H 128 CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 2 81H 129 CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0
298. ttings offset value CHS User range settings gain value CHE User range settings offset value CHE User range settings gain value CH7 User range settings offset value CH User range settings gain value E CHB User range settings offset value O CH8 User range settings gain value Pass data read request No request Setting request _ Ee Pass data write request No request Setting request oO Flash ROM setting Details L Current value Monitoring i eae Select input a Make text file Setting range To Voltage specified Current specified Zz O Stop monitor Execute test gi Q uw 2 User range saving a Wo near a Set Voltage specified or Current specified in the Setting value field of Pass eee data classification setting and click the Execute test button When the setting is completed the set data is displayed in the Current value field of CH Pass data classification setting b Change the Setting value field of Pass data read request to Request and click f4 O E q q x K5 x9 n Ww z O rs x lt 2 a q the Execute test button When read is completed the values are displayed in the Current value fields of CH O Industrial shipment settings offset gain values CH O User range settings D offset gain values c Compare the values with those in the range reference table and record them if 5 they are correct Refer to Section 7 4 for the range reference table W 5 fa S
299. ty Start Setting screen z Display when the lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab is selected Intelligent function module utility D MELSEC GPPW AD DER Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help 2 2 e Select a target intelligent function module 2 Start 1 0 No Module type DO 0000 A D Conversion Module Module model name Q684D G o Zz O Parameter setting module T FB Support Parameter 2 8 W Q 2 Zz O oe Ww W FB parameter gt gt ara Z20 lt A Ww Initial setting Auto refresh S Q amp FOL wo Ww Explanation of items nes 1 Activation of other screens Following screens can be displayed from the intelligent function module utility screen Common operations to the lt lt Intelligent function module parameter gt gt tab and lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab f4 O E q 5 x9 n Ww Zz O rs x lt 2 a q a Initial setting screen Start O No Module type Module model name Initial setting b Auto refresh setting screen Z Start O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh z o O c Select monitor test module screen Online Monitor Test 1 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal W 5 On the lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab 3 Lu Lu a Start up of the FB conversion screen Z Z lt E lt lt FB support parameter gt gt tab FB conversion ae
300. uct is licensed to Name Company ProductID List of version information on Add in software GX Configurator D Yersion2 05F S W2D5C QADU E COPYRIGHT C 28044 BISHYELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Software version Warming This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law In the case of GX Developer Version 8 2 3 How to Check the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 SPECIFICATIONS i The description of this chapter and later is based on the Q68AD G g D 3 1 Performance Specifications 6 3 1 1 Performance specifications list z Z0 Table 3 1 shows the performance specifications of the A D converter modules 08 Table3 1 Performance Specifications of Q68AD G Item Specifications A Number of analog input Z p gpu 8 points 8 channels 2 points lt o 3 Voltage 10 to 10VDC Input impedance 1 MQ or more L Analog input 8 Current 0 to 20mADC Input resistance 250Q f Dieiel ewini 16 bit signed binary normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 high resolution mode 12288 to 12287 2 igi utpu 9 p 16384 to 16383 U
301. uest Y9 from OFF to ON to stop conversion After confirming that conversion has stopped with the A D conversion completion flag Un G10 turn off Operation Condition Setting Request Y9 Device test Bit device E Device 3 FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force m Word device buffer memory Hide history Device Buffer memory Module start 1 0 0000 Hex 0 y DEC 7 Address Setting value FF HEX 16 bit integer v Set Program Label reference program MAIN E Execution history Setting condition _ Y3 Force ON Module start 0 Address 0 D FF H Force OFF The screen shows the setting example of the Q68AD G 2 Dismounting of module a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode double click the module to be changed online to display the Online module change screen System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module MasterPLC gt 1 2 3 Main base Powe rsu pply Q25PHCPU l unti Unmoj ng Unmo unti ng Unmo unti ng c Parameter status 0 Address 0 10 20 30 0 1 2 3 Powe rsu Q25PHCPU pply Intelli gent 16pt None 16pt None 16pt None 16pt Status i Module system error Hi Module change z
302. ule On Normal operation 1 RUN LED Flashing During offset gain setting mode m Off 5V power supply interrupted watchdog timer error occurred or 5 online module change enabled Displays the error status of the A D converter module On gt Error A 2 ERR LED Flashing Error in switch settings Switch No 5 of the intelligent function s module has been set to a value other than zero E off Normal operation fa z Displays the alarm status of the A D converter module gt 6 On An alarm process alarm rate alarm occurred 3 ALM LED Flashing An input signal error occurred Off Normal operation FG terminal L Shaped Metal fitting to wire for FG of the Q66AD DG 4 4 metal fitting Q66AD DG E only g 5 Serial No display Displays the serial No of the A D converter module g 1 Check the error code for details amp 2 When the module is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the RUN LED stays off until a data link starts normally even after the power is turned on The RUN LED turns on once a data link starts EJ Point When two or more errors have occurred the latest error found by the A D converter module is indicated with the LED z O lt a W Q fo W a O L m a n W a 2 lt a n Ww Q fe a o GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 4 3 Part Names 4 5 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION
303. ut signal error detection setting value value input signal error detection lower limit setting value Un G142 to Un G149 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value Un G150 to Un G157 on any of the channels enabled for A D conversion after the Input signal error detec tion is made valid When the Input signal error detection signal turns ON 1 The A D conversion completed flag Un G10 of the corresponding channel turns OFF 2 The digital output value is held as at the time of error detection 3 The ALM LED flickers By bringing the analog input value within the setting range and then turning ON the Error clear request YF the Input signal error detection signal XC turns OFF and the ALM LED is extinguished When the analog input value returns to within the setting range A D conversion is resumed independently of whether the Input signal error detection signal XC is reset or not and after the first updating the A D conversion completed flag Un G10 of the corresponding channel turns ON again The processing such as averaging processing or primary delay filter starts from the first time after resumption of A D conversion gt Performed by the A D converter module gt Performed by the sequence program Input signal error detection flag Un G49 0 Input signal error detection Input signal error detection signal XC Error clear request YF Offset gain change
304. ut signals and external supply power of the Q66AD DG to avoid influences of AC side surge or induction SPECIFICATIONS 3 Keep a distance among the main circuit line a high voltage cable and a load cable from other than the programmable controller Failure to do so may increase the effects of noise surges and induction 4 The shield wire or the shield of the shielded cable must be grounded at one end 5 When wiring to the module placed on the right side of the Q66AD DG is difficult remove the Q66AD DG before wiring z O lt a W Q fo W a O L m a n W 4 2 tO n Ww Q fe a o GX CONFIGURATOR UTILITY PACKAGE AD PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING 4 4 Wiring 4 7 4 4 1 Wiring precautions 4 SETUP AND PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC TA eries 4 4 2 External wiring 1 Q68AD G a For voltage input Signal source 0 to 10V 1 ol 7 I ai D E Ea 5 J 5 Shield 5 b For current input Signal source 0 to 20mA V o S 2 a l C4 a a D c pa 250Q g 3 J Shield oa 5 iad Fe 2 3 A 5 Use a 2 core twisted shielded wire for the power wire Shows input resistance For current input be sure to connect V and I terminals Connect V terminal to I terminal in the external device connecti
305. ute Cancel b The Online module change completed screen appears MELSOFT series GX Developer x e UI Online module change completed 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 3 1 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M aLS a6 Q series 7 3 2 made with sequence program When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was 1 Conversion disable a Set the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channel conversion disable and turn operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON to stop conversion After confirming that conversion has stopped with the A D conversion completion flag Un G10 turn off Operation Condition Setting Request Y9 The screen shows the setting example of the Q68AD G Device test Bit device Device vo Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF _ Toggle force Word device buffer memory Buffer memory Module start 1 0 0000 Hex Address 0 v DEC C Device Setting value FF HEX 16 bitinteger Set Program Label reference program MAIN X Execution history Setting condition Force ON FF H Force OFF Module start 0 Address 0 D 2 Dismounting of module a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode double click the module to be changed
306. utput settings no vov R000 eae CH2 process alarm lower lower limit value rov kiso aay CH2 process alarm lower 4 upper limit value Ea uo rov eau ey CH2 process alarm upper 2 lower limit value lt uo O tov x7000 ee CH2 process alarm upper fi upper limit value o ov kso yy CH3 rate alarm warning i 4 detection period n u0 ov m cisi CH3 rate alarm upper limit value U0 Zz poy a ait J CH3 rate alarm lower limit value E uo ov kini mon CH1 input signal error o g detection setting value ara p 290 Tome ag Turns ON operation condition tow setting request Y9 2 Ww z o mo J Turns OFF Module in 9 r Ea ready check flag nam zo as i isin y Turns OFF operation condition i f setting request Y9 Read digital output values N oa x10 x0 xo e ae Read the A D conversion ng 1 ov to x2x0 J completed flag uP MO voy a Q mov G11 D1 J Read the CH1 digital output value 5 O M1 uO z lt 2 mov G12 D2 J Read the CH2 digital output value 5 p aE m2 a US n Read the CH3 digital I Warning process alarm rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence output value 5 Og sm400 ao ee zavio q Read the warning ei output flag Process alarm e oy PON zazo q Read the warning ki ic 4 output flag Rate alarm M12 _ Processing at CH2 process Oo it Processing at warning occurrence alarm upper limit value z warning occurrence M13 _
307. value System S 9 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 10 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 11 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 12 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 13 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 14 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 15 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 16 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 17 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 18 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value System S 19 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value System S 20 CH1 user range settings offset value System S 21 CH1 user range settings gain value System S 22 CH2 user range settings offset value System S 23 CH2 user range settings gain value System S 24 CH3 user range settings offset value System S 25 CH3 user range settings gain value System S 26 CH4 user range settings offset value System S 27 CH4 user range settings gain value System S 28 CH5 user range settings offset value System S 29 CH5 user range settings gain value System S 30 CH6 user range settings offset value Syst
308. value in the input range being used rs SH Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value 6 g TE RRES a a Example On the Q68AD G using the scaling function in High resolution mode 586 and in the input range of 10 to 10V Oo m If the setting is Scaling upper limit value SH 14000 x Scaling lower limit value St 2000 b3 and the digital output value Dx is 7500 9 awk z 538 7500x 14000 2000 14000 2000 Scaling value F 16000 16000 2 10812 5 g 10812 It omits digits below the decimal point 9 oa W 5 a S 2 OO 0 Z E O O a i a O E 3 2 Function List 3 31 3 2 6 Scaling Function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries b When using the user range setting for the input range DX SH SL g Scaling value DMAX Dx Digital output value Sux _ The maximum digital output value in the input range being used A D conversion value corresponding to the gain value SH Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value Example On the Q68AD G using the scaling function in High resolution mode and in the user range setting If the setting is Scaling upper limit value SH 10000 Scaling lower limit value SL 2000 and the digital output value 4250 is input 4250 x 10000 2000 12000 4833 33 4833 Scaling value 2000 It omits digits below the decimal point EJ Point The setting range allowed for the scaling upper and lower
309. values is 32000 to 32000 Note that the resolution will not change even if a scaling upper lower limit value is set to change more than the resolution 3 32 3 2 Function List 3 2 6 Scaling Function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 3 I O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU i 3 3 1 List of I O signals u Table 3 4 lists the I O signals of the Q68AD G Table 3 5 lists the I O signals of the Q66AD DG Note that I O numbers X Y shown in this chapter and thereafter are the values when the 5 E start I O number for the A D converter module is set to 0 T Z0 Table3 6 List of I O signal Q68AD G D z nO Signal direction CPU Module lt Q68AD G Signal direction CPU Module Q68AD G Device No input Device No Output X0 Module ready YO S X1 Y1 X2 Y2 F se U hibited abs E se prohibite i o X4 prama Y4 Use prohibited wl X5 Y5 n X6 Y6 X7 High resolution mode status flag Y7 z X8 Warning output signal Y8 2 x9 Operating condition setting completed flag Y9 Operating condition setting request 2 g XA Offset gain setting mode flag YA User range writing request z z 5 XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request a W 4 XC Input signal error detection signal YC Use prohibited i g m XD Maximum value minimum value reset YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag request XE A D conversion compl
310. values other than the maximum and minimum values is averaged and the result is stored into the buffer memory The processing count within the set time varies depending on the number of channels used number of channels set as A D conversion enable 2 Z o lt Q L O wW a N Processing count Set time No of channels used x 10 times a Example When setting 6 for the number of channels used and 500ms for the od set time ori 500 6 x 10 8 333 times Drop the fractional part a Bet b Count averaging a5 A D conversion is made the preset number of times the sum of values other than the maximum and minimum values is averaged and the result is stored into the He buffer memory SE The time required for the count based average value to be stored into the buffer 22 Zz memory varies depending on the number of channels used number of channels ES set as A D conversion enable ESQ Processing time Set count x No of channels used x 10 ms Example When setting 5 times for the average processing count 5 x 6 x 10 50 ms g c Moving average The specified count of digital output values imported per sampling time are aver aged to find a value which is then stored into the buffer memory Since average processing is performed with data shifted per sampling the most recent digital output value is obtainable if 5 a S 2 OO 0 Z E O O a i a O E 3 2 Function List 3 15 3 2 1 A D conver
311. veloper and Intelligent function module utility again To start the Intelligent function module utility a In GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for PLC series and specify a project If any PLC series other than QCPU Q mode is selected or if no project is spec ified the Intelligent function module utility will not start b Multiple Intelligent function module utilities can be started However Open parameters and Save parameters operations under Intelligent function module parameter are allowed for one Intelligent function module utility only Only the Monitor test operation is allowed for the other utilities Switching between two or more Intelligent function module utilities When two or more Intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side select a screen to be displayed on the top of others using the task bar s Start iP MELSOFT series GX D Intelligent function m 2 Intelligent function m 5 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 5 2 1 Handling precautions 5 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD M als 26 fel ceries 6 Number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator AD When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of parameter it settings must not exceed the following limit i 4 J Maximum number of parameter settings 2 When intelligent function modules are installed to
312. will be cleared to 0 when the operating condition setting request Y9 is set to ON and the setting is changed or when the maximum value minimum value reset request YD is set to ON CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 For the channel where averaging processing is specified also the maximum and minimum values of the digital values from sampling processing are stored in this area 4 When the scaling function is enabled maximum minimum values after scaling conversion are stored o Z Q lt 9 O W a 7 3 4 11 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detec tion setting Un G47 Zz O 1 This area is used to set whether the input signal error detection process alarm or z n rate alarm will be enabled or disabled for each channel ave If the warning of input signal error detection is enabled the input signal error detection amp P wy N sn g z Q can be performed by setting the same value of upper and lower limit or different value 289 Ww W of upper and lower limit nam 2 To validate the input signal error detection extended input signal error detection P zus O setting the operating condition setting request Y9 must be turned ON OFF Referto t a Section 3 3 2 e ay 3 gt 3 All channels for the input signal error detection and all channels for the input signal ES error detection extended setting are set to the same value of upper limit and lower 502 limit
313. wing operations can be processed by using sequence pro grams Note that these operations are possible for the modules of the same model only Refer to Chapter7 e Transferring the offset gain set values to the replacement A D converter module e Transferring the offset and gain set values to another A D converter module mounted on the other slot 13 Offset gain setting GX Configurator AD dedicated instruction G P OF FGAN or mode switching setting allows a shift to the offset gain setting mode easily 14 Easy settings using GX Configurator AD Using GX Configurator AD which is sold separately sequence programs can be reduced since settings of the A D converter module can be made on the screen Also the set status or operating status of the module can be checked easily A FB can be created automatically from the set intelligent function module parame ter and can be used in sequence programs 1 FB is the function for making a circuit block used in a sequence program repeatedly a part FB to use it in the sequence program This function can improve the efficiency of program development and minimize program bugs to improve program qualities For the details of FB refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the A D converter module 2 1 Applicable Systems
314. witch 4 of the intelligent function module switch setting for GX Developer to the normal mode Refer to Section 4 5 Is the mode set to the offset gain setting mode 2 When off Check item Corrective action Confirm that the supply voltage for the power supply module is within the rated range Calculate the current consumption of the CPU module I O module Is the capacity of the power supply module adequate and intelligent function module mounted on the base unit to see if the power supply capacity is adequate Reset the programmable controller CPU and verify that it is lit If the RUN LED does not light even after doing this the module may be malfunctioning Please consult your local Mitsubishi represen tative explaining the detailed description of the problem Is the module correctly mounted on the base unit Check the mounting condition of the module Is a module change enabled during an online module change Refer to Chapter 7 and take corrective action Is the power being supplied Has a watchdog timer error occurred 8 2 2 When the ERR LED is on or flashing 1 When on Check item Corrective action j Confirm the error code and take corrective action described in Is an error being generated P Section 8 1 2 When flashing Check item Corrective action Using GX Developer parameter setting set intelligent function module setting switch 5 to 0 Refer to Section 4 5 Is intelligent fu
315. xecute button after installing a new module z o m O W Q N Cancel Zz O Ee 4 Operation check ae oft a To make an operation check click the Cancel button to cancel control A a m a resumption 590 W W oom Online module change Operation Target module a we Module change execution 1 0 address 000H oO 7 E Module name Q684D G 5 Installation confirmation oO c Status 5 Module control restart 7 Change module installation completion E 2 z Exa Status Guidance D24 The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute oO Z 3 Cancel oO O x A b Click the OK button to leave the Online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer The online module change mode is stopped Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again w 5 a ie Ww z z e W 1 Zz lt x oO TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 12 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA eries c Click the Close button to close the System monitor screen System Monitor Installed status Base 2 4 Base Module Mast
316. y writing condition iT Yi rt mov H Writing Operating Operating request condition condition l anes Sanit EE lag L 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 8 Buffer memory assignment of Q68AD G 3 6 Aqdress Description Default R w 1 Reference Hexadecimal Decimal z 44H 68 CH4 Scaling lower limit value 0 RIW 2 z 45x 69 CH4 Scaling upper limit value 0 RIW 2 z 46H 70 CH5 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 2 4TH 71 CH5 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 48H 72 CH6 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 2 Section 3 4 17 Z 49H 73 CH6 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 Z 4AnH 74 CH7 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 2 E 4Bu 15 CH7 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 fa 4CH 76 CH8 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 2 gt 6 4Du 77 CH8 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 2 4EH 78 to to System area _ 55H 85 56H 86 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 2 3 57H 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 i 58H 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 wl 59H 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RIW 2 2 SAH 90 CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 2 5BH 91 CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 2 5CH 92 CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 2 m z 5DH 93 CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 RW
317. z Fa oO Oo a Ww a 5 a ie Ww z m z e wW 0 z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 1 Online Module Change Conditions 7 2 T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series 7 2 Online Module Change Operations The following gives the operations performed for an online module change CPU operation Executed i Not executed FROM TO instruc Dedi cated Intelligent function module operation Initial setting parame ter X Y User operation refresh Device N z Monitor instruc MOE test tion 1 1 Conversion disable Turn OFF all Y signals that were turned ON by a sequence program Module is operating as usual Y Module stops operating RUN LED turns off Conversion disabled 2 Dismounting of module Operate GX Developer to start an online module change Click the Execution button of GX Developer to make the module dismountable Dismount the corresponding module 3 Mounting of new module Mount a new module y X Y refresh resumes and the module starts RUN LED turns off Default operation X0 remains OFF When there are initial setting parameters operation is performed according to the initial setting parameters at this point y After mounting the module click the Execution button of GX Developer x
318. z Prd I rs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Online Module Change Procedure 7 14 7 3 2 When industrial shipment setting is used and initial setting was made with sequence program T ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA eries 7 3 3 When user range setting is used and initial setting was made with GX Configurator AD other system is available 1 Conversion disable a Set the A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channel conversion disable and turn operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON to stop conversion After confirming that conversion has stopped with the A D conversion completion flag Un G10 turn off Operation Condition Setting Request Y9 Device test Bit device Device v9 x Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF _ Toggle force Word device buffer memory C Device x Buffer memory Module start vooo Hex Address o z Dec x Setting value FF HEX i6 bitinteger x Set Program Label reference program MAIN Execution history Device Setting condition id Ya ei Force ON Module start 0 Address 0 D FF H Force OFF The screen shows the setting example of the Q68AD G 2 Dismounting of module a After choosing Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to enter the Online module change mode double click the module to be changed online to display the Online module change screen System Monitor Inst

Channel Isolated Analog-Digital Converter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents